Tabela Técnica LHM550 141044 - BAL - 001 - EN 550

Operating manual EN
Type:
LHM 550
Serial number:
14
ORIGINAL 001 - .0.2011 / lwnscr2

HARBOUR MOBILE CRANE
LHM 550
CAPACIDALE DE CARGA DOS CABOS
LOAD CAPACITY ON THE ROPES
MÁX. VELOCIDADE DO VENTO PERMITIDA
MAX. ALLOWED WINDSPEED 24m/s = 86km/h
RAIO CURVA DE CARGA PESADA 75% GRAB MOTORIZADO

RADIUS LOAD CURVE 75% NL MOTOR GRAB
[m] [t] [t]
11 104,0 90,0
12 104,0 90,0
13 104,0 90,0
14 104,0 90,0
15 104,0 90,0
16 104,0 90,0
17 104,0 90,0
18 104,0 90,0
19 104,0 90,0
20 104,0 90,0
21 104,0 90,0
22 104,0 90,0
23 104,0 88,1
24 104,0 83,8
25 104,0 79,9
26 104,0 76,2
27 102,5 72,9
28 97,7 69,5
29 93,3 66,3
30 89,2 63,4
31 85,6 60,9
32 82,3 58,5
33 79,0 56,2
34 76,0 54,1
35 73,3 52,1
36 70,7 50,3
37 68,3 48,5
38 66,0 47,0
39 63,9 45,5
40 62,0 44,1
41 60,1 42,8
42 58,4 41,5
43 56,8 40,4
44 55,2 39,3
45 53,7 38,2
46 52,2 37,1
47 50,7 36,0
48 49,3 35,0
49 47,8 34,0
50 46,4 33,0
51 45,0 32,0
52 43,6 31,0
53 42,2 30,0
54 40,9 29,1
ITEM CODE: 10563184

REVISION: 00
HARBOUR MOBILE CRANE
LHM 550
TRANSLAÇÃO NA POSIÇÃO DE CIMA
TRAVELLING IN UPRIGHT POSITION
MÁX. VELOCIDADE DO VENTO PERMITIDA 20m/s = 72km/h
MAX. ALLOWED WINDSPEED 20m/s = 72km/h
MINIMO RADIO MAXIMO RADIO

MIN. RADIUS MAX. RADIUS
[t] (m) (m)
25 20,0 23,0
24 20,2 23,7
23 20,3 24,4
22 20,5 25,1
21 20,6 25,9
20 20,8 26,7
19 20,9 27,5
18 21,1 28,3
17 21,2 29,3
16 21,3 30,2
15 21,5 31,2
14 21,6 32,2
13 21,7 33,3
12 21,9 34,5
11 22,0 35,8
10 22,2 37,1
9 22,4 38,6
8 22,6 40,1
7 22,7 41,8
6 22,9 43,5
5 23,2 45,4
4 23,4 47,5
3 23,7 49,8
2 23,9 52,4
1 24,4 54,0
0 25,0 54,0
ÂNGULO DE GIRO 0° JIB SOBRE A PARTE FRONTAL DO CARRO INFERIOR
SLEW ANGLE 0° JIB OVER FRONT PART OF UNDERCARRIAGE
MINIMO RADIO MAXIMO RADIO

MIN. RADIUS MAX. RADIUS
[t] (m) (m)
25 12,0 15,0
24 12,2 15,9
23 12,3 16,7
22 12,5 17,5
21 12,6 18,3
20 12,8 19,2
19 12,9 20,1
18 13,1 21,1
17 13,3 22,1
16 13,5 23,3
15 13,7 24,4
14 13,9 25,7
13 14,1 27,1
12 14,3 28,5
11 14,6 30,1
10 14,8 31,8
9 15,1 33,6
8 15,4 35,7
7 15,7 37,9
6 16,0 40,4
5 16,4 43,3
4 16,8 46,9
3 17,2 51,7
2 17,6 54,0
1 18,1 54,0
0 18,1 54,0
ÂNGULO DE GIRO 180° JIB SOBRE A PARTE TRASEIRA DO CARRO INFERIOR
SLEW ANGLE 180° JIB OVER REAR PART OF UNDERCARRIAGE
TABLA DE CARGA PARA TRANSLÃÇAO DO EQUIPAMENTO COM SPREADER, GRAB

ETC. (SEM NENHUMA CARGA)
LOAD CHART FOR TRAVELLING EQUIPMENT LIKE SPREADER, GRAB
ETC.(WITHOUT ANY CARGO)
ITEM CODE: 10563184

REVISION: 00
User Guide
This operation manual has been written for the machine operator. It contains
all the information necessary to operate, control and carry out simple mainte
nance on the machine.
The operation manual must be read with care and obeyed by everyone who:
` works with the machine.
` is instructed to carry out work on the machine.
Work with or on the machine includes:

` Commissioning, operation, including the changing of slinging tackle
` Maintenance, servicing, inspection and repair, dealing with supplies and
auxiliary materials
The operation manual and the relevant load chart belong with the ma
chine and must therefore be ready to hand in every operators cabin.
Compliance with the operation manual by maintenance personnel:

` increases reliability while in use.
` increases the service life of the machine.
` reduces repair costs and downtime.
Contact Liebherr after sales service for all other questions (also if you sell
the machine or purchase it from a previous owner).
Latest version of the documentation
To ensure the documentation is always complete and up to date:

` Do not remove individual documents.
` Replace any missing or unreadable pages by reprinting them from the
CD-ROM or request them from Liebherr after sales service.
` Insert immediately new documents supplied as a result of modifications.
` Replace amended documents and destroy the old version (particularly in
the case of load charts).
` Always replace the CD-ROM by a new version, e.g. from revision docu
ments.
` Update all languages to the latest version in the case of multilingual do
cumentation.
Storage of documentation
` Always keep the operation manual ready to hand in every cabin.
` The spare parts catalogue and technical information must be available to
maintenance and service personnel if required.
LHM 550_001 1
Structure and content of the documentation:
The operation manual contains:

` “Product description
` “Safety
` "Operating elements"
` “Operation
` “Maintenance
The technical information contains:

` General diagrams
` Hydraulic diagrams
` Electrical diagrams
The documentation accompanying the product contains documentation re

garding any:
` Attachments, e.g. cable drums, air conditioning systems, etc.
` Rigging material, e.g. rotators, spreaders, grabs, etc.
The spare parts catalogue provides information about:

` All the spare parts used in the machine
` Spare part procurement
The CD-ROM contains all the machine documentation in digital form.
NOTE
4 All images in this operation manual are symbolic and may differ from the
delivery state.
System requirements for use of the CD
Hardware (minimum)
` Intel® Pentium II® PC 500MHz, 128 MB RAM, CD-ROM drive,
minimum resolution of 800 x 600 pixels, high-colour depth
Software
` Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Internet Explorer 5.5, Adobe
Acrobat Reader 7.0
NOTE
4 Ensure that popup blockers are not activated when using Liebherr Parts.
This functionality is included in certain web browsers and in firewalls.
4 Permit Active Scripting if requested.
2 LHM 550_001
Symbols, danger symbols and signal words:
An optional retrofit kit (NRS - NachRüstSatz (retrofit kit)) is indicated by an *.
* Each description marked with an * does not have to correspond to the delivery
state of the machine. The optional retrofit kit actually fitted to the machine is
shown in the machine licence (see Product description).
` List entry
S List sub-entry
equipment or retrofit kit contained in the machine licence
equipment or retrofit kit not contained in the machine licence
u active handling instruction
w Consequence of the handling instruction
DANGER
High-risk situation that will result in death or serious injury.
4 Refers to action to be taken to reduce or prevent the danger.
WARNING
Medium-risk situation that can result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Low-risk situation that could result in minor or slight injuries or material
damage.
CAUTION
Low-risk situation resulting in material damage.
NOTE
Useful note.
4 Indicates a note in the crane operation manual.
Disposal
Avoid the risk of environmental damage!
4 Dispose of all hazardous materials, such as: waste oil, cooling liquid,
contaminated filter elements, etc., in accordance with national or regional
regulations.
FIRST AID
LHM 550_001 3
Warranty claims arising from improper operation, inadequate maintenance,
use of non-approved supplies or non-compliance with safety regulations will not
be admitted.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the machine as against
the descriptions and illustrations in this document.
This documentation is protected by copyright. The information and images in

this manual are not to be duplicated, reproduced, translated, converted for the
purposes of storing and processing in DP systems or used for competitive pur
poses either in whole or in part. The copying and duplication of load charts in
connection with work planning and the use of this machine is expressly per
mitted. All legal rights embodied in copyright law are expressly reserved.
Liebherr-Werk Nenzing Gmbh

P.O. Box 10
Dr. Hans Liebherr Strasse 1
6710 Nenzing
AUSTRIA / EUROPE
Telephone: +43 50809 41-0

Fax: +43 50809 41-500
e-mail: info.lwn@liebherr.com
website: www.liebherr.com
4 LHM 550_001
1. Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.2 Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.3 Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.3.1 Declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.3.2 State-of-the-art technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.3.3 Type plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.4 Appropriate use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.5 Inappropriate use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.6 Technical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

1.6.1 Overall machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.6.2 Undercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.6.3 Boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.6.4 Slewing platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.6.5 Slewing platform - machinery house . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.6.6 Slewing platform middle section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.6.7 Slewing platform winch compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.6.8 Slewing platform cabin* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.6.9 Tower cabin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.7 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

1.7.1 Supporting base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.7.2 Eye level tower cabin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.7.3 Outreach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1.7.4 Lifting height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1.7.5 Tower extension* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1.7.6 Fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.7.7 Hydraulic tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.7.8 Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.7.9 Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1.7.10 Noise emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1.7.11 Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1.7.12 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1.7.13 Wheel sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.7.14 Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.8 Safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

1.8.1 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
1.8.2 Emergency lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
LHM 550_001 5
1.8.3 Limit switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1.8.4 Litronic control system, monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1.8.5 Safety lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1.8.6 Fire extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1.8.7 Fire detection and extinguishing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.8.8 Fire protection hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.8.9 Acoustic signalling transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.8.10 Rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.8.11 Hand rails and anti-fold mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1.8.12 Operation manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
1.8.13 Video monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
1.8.14 Battery main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
1.8.15 Location of the emergency stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2. Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.1 Areas of responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.1.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.1.2 Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.1.3 Machine operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.1.4 Rigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.1.5 Banksman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.1.6 Maintenance personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.2 Requirements to personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

2.2.1 Machine operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
2.2.2 Rigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
2.2.3 Banksman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.2.4 Maintenance personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.3 Personal protective equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2.4 Work area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2.5 Danger zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
2.6 Safety signs on the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2.7 Safety signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

2.7.1 Meaning of the safety signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2.8 Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.8.1 Mechanical action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.8.2 Hydraulic energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
2.8.3 Burns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
6 LHM 550_001
2.8.4 Chemical burns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.8.5 Snow and ice loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.8.6 Lightning strike . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2.8.7 Danger of fire and explosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
2.8.8 Poisoning and suffocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.8.9 Environmental hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
2.8.10 Electromagnetic influence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
2.8.11 Exposure to wind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2.9 Danger from electrical energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

2.9.1 Overhead power lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2.9.2 Underground lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
2.9.3 Resistance area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
2.10 How to respond in the event of a current transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

2.10.1 Leaving the machine after an accident with a low voltage line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
2.10.2 Leaving the machine after an accident with a high voltage line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2.11 How to respond in the event of a fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

2.11.1 Firefighting using a fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
2.11.2 Firefighting using the fire detection and extinguishing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
2.11.3 Leaving the machine in the event of a fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
2.12 Hand signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

2.12.1 General hand signals in accordance with BGV A8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
2.12.2 Special hand signals for lifting device
operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
2.12.3 Hand signals for lifting device operations in accordance with ASME/ANSI B30.5 . . . 100
3. Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3.2 Control station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
3.3 Left master switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

3.3.1 Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
3.3.2 Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
3.4 Right master switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

3.4.1 Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
3.4.2 Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
3.5 Control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

3.5.1 Control panel X25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
3.5.2 Control panel X26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
LHM 550_001 7
3.5.3 Control panel X27 and X28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
3.5.4 Fire detection and extinguishing system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
3.5.5 Switch cabinet X1, X32 (switch cabinet room) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
3.6 Litronic screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

3.6.1 Monitor overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
3.6.2 Start symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
3.6.3 Status indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
3.6.4 Function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
3.6.5 Crane operation screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
3.6.6 Crane operation screen symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
3.6.7 Travel operation screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
3.6.8 Travel operation screen symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
3.6.9 Wheel set screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
3.6.10 Information screen diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
3.6.11 Service hour meter screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
3.6.12 General settings screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
3.6.13 Operation mode screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
3.6.14 Hydraulic information screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
3.6.15 Electric information screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
4. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
4.1 Inspections before daily commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
4.1.1 Daily inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
4.1.2 Daily inspection work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
4.2 Commissioning the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

4.2.1 Start with diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
4.2.2 Shutting down the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
4.3 Safety lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
4.4 Travelling mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

4.4.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
4.4.2 Normal travel operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
4.4.3 Crab mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
4.4.4 Steering synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
4.4.5 Steering examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
4.5 Supporting the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

4.5.1 Supporting the machine manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
4.5.2 Support cylinder pressure information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
4.5.3 Choose additional supporting base* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
4.5.4 Support pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8 LHM 550_001
4.6 Crane operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
4.6.1 Crane movements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
4.6.2 Stop crane movements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
4.7 Fuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
4.8 Air cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
4.9 Auxiliary supply* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
4.10 Correcting rope twist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
4.11 Four-rope grab* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

4.11.1 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
4.11.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
4.12 Motor grab* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

4.12.1 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
4.12.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
4.13 Rotator* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

4.13.1 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
4.13.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
4.14 Spreader* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

4.14.1 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
4.14.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
4.15 Laying down the boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
4.16 Video monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

4.16.1 Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
4.16.2 Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
4.16.3 control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
4.16.4 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
4.17 Litronic testing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

4.17.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
4.17.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
4.17.3 Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
4.17.4 Home screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
4.17.5 INPUT/OUTPUT page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
4.17.6 MEMORY page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
4.17.7 SELECT page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
4.17.8 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
LHM 550_001 9
4.18 Operator`s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
4.18.1 Adjusting the driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
4.19 Windscreen wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
4.20 Telephone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

4.20.1 Telephone sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
4.20.2 Handset operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
4.20.3 Headset and control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
4.20.4 Change batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
4.21 PA amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

4.21.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
4.21.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
4.22 Undercarriage bell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
4.23 Emergency exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

4.23.1 Slewing platform emergency exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
4.23.2 Emergency exit from the tower cabin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
4.24 Decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

4.24.1 Short work interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
4.24.2 Long work interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
4.25 Emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
5. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
5.1 Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
5.2 Lubrication and oiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
5.3 Filling capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
5.4 Lubrication chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

5.4.1 Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
5.5 Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

5.5.1 Checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
5.5.2 Topping up the engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
5.5.3 Draining the engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
5.5.4 Changing the oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
5.5.5 Changing the oil separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
5.6 Fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
10 LHM 550_001
5.6.1 Draining condensate in the fuel prefilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
5.6.2 Draining condensate in the fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
5.6.3 Draining condensate in the fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
5.6.4 Cleaning the fuel prefilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
5.6.5 Changing the fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
5.6.6 Bleeding the fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
5.7 Air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

5.7.1 Checking air filter and intake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
5.7.2 Emptying the dust extraction valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
5.7.3 Emptying the dust reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
5.7.4 Changing the filter element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
5.8 Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

5.8.1 Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
5.8.2 Checking the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
5.8.3 Top up coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
5.8.4 Draining coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
5.8.5 Changing the cap of the compensation tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
5.8.6 Cleaning the water and charge air cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
5.9 Electric motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
5.10 Distributor gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

5.10.1 Checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
5.10.2 Topping up the gear oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
5.10.3 Draining the gear oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
5.11 Slewing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

5.11.1 Check the slewing gear oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
5.11.2 Topping up slewing gear oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
5.11.3 Draining the slewing gear oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
5.11.4 Grease the toothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
5.11.5 Lubricate the stud bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
5.11.6 Checking bearing lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
5.12 Hoisting gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

5.12.1 Checking hoisting gear oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
5.12.2 Topping up hoisting gear oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
5.12.3 Draining the hoisting gear oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
5.13 Travelling gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

5.13.1 Checking the wheel set gear oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
5.13.2 Topping up the wheel set gear oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
5.13.3 Draining the wheel set gear oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
LHM 550_001 11
5.13.4 Checking the wheel set suspension cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
5.13.5 Adjusting the wheel set suspension cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
5.13.6 Manual greasing of wheel set drive units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
5.13.7 Lubricating wheel set axles and links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
5.13.8 Wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
5.13.9 Tyres, tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
5.13.10 Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
5.14 Hydraulic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

5.14.1 Initial filling of hydraulic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
5.14.2 Mixing hydraulic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
5.14.3 Checking the hydraulic oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
5.14.4 Topping up with hydraulic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
5.14.5 Draining the hydraulic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
5.14.6 Hydraulic oil return filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
5.14.7 Hydraulic oil pressure filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
5.14.8 Testing the pressure accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
5.14.9 Changing the accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
5.14.10 Hydraulic cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
5.14.11 Hydraulic hoses and hose lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
5.14.12 Oil diagnosis system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
5.15 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

5.15.1 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
5.15.2 Switch cabinets and termination boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
5.15.3 Replacing the generator air filter mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
5.15.4 Replace fuses and lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
5.15.5 Check the emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
5.15.6 Checking the hoisting limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
5.15.7 Check the undercarriage flap (centre ladder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
5.15.8 Cleaning the monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
5.15.9 Replacing the cable of the boom cable drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
5.15.10 Cleaning the undercarriage slip ring unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
5.16 Emergency devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

5.16.1 Fire extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
5.16.2 Rescue equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
5.16.3 Personal protective equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
5.17 Steel structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
5.18 Central lubrication system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

5.18.1 Topping up grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
5.19 Boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
12 LHM 550_001
5.19.1 Check the oil level of the boom cable drum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
5.19.2 Topping up boom cable drum oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
5.19.3 Draining the boom cable drum oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
5.20 Ropes and pulleys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

5.20.1 Checking ropes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
5.20.2 Rope discard criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
5.20.3 Checking the rope diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
5.20.4 Rope deformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
5.20.5 Checking for corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
5.20.6 Checking for rope abrasion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
5.20.7 Checking for heat damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
5.20.8 Checking the number of permitted wire breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
5.20.9 Storing ropes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
5.20.10 Transporting ropes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
5.20.11 Winding ropes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
5.20.12 Checking the rope drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
5.20.13 Wear of steel pulleys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
5.20.14 Wear of plastic pulleys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
5.20.15 Checking pulleys for damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
5.20.16 Lubricating pulley bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
5.20.17 Cleaning plastic pulleys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
5.20.18 Luffing ropes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
5.20.19 Lubricate ropes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
5.21 Checking the Nemag shackle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
5.22 Ventilation, heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
5.23 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
5.24 Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

5.24.1 Climatic zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
5.24.2 Preservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
5.24.3 Recommended conservative agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
5.24.4 Coating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
5.24.5 Recommended coating materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
LHM 550_001 13
14 LHM 550_001
1
ï
Product description
1. Product description
This operation manual describes the design, control elements, functions and
maintenance for LHM (Liebherr Hafen Mobil) cranes of the following size:
` LHM 550
This operation manual also applies to special versions of the above LHM
models identified by suffix letters (S, G, L). These special versions are cu
stomer-specific and essentially distinguished by:
` The number of wheel sets (driven and non-driven)
` Lifting capacity and associated outreach
` Winch configuration
` Counterweight
1.1 General
This chapter provides information on
` The capabilities of the machine
` The equipment and additional equipment of the machine
` Assembly of the main components
` Main technical data
` Importance and arrangement of safety devices on the machine
1.2 Use
NOTE
4 Essentially, the machine may only be used for the operations listed and
described in this operating manual.
Prerequisites for the safe operation of the machine:

` Resting on solid ground
` Operation within the permitted load curve
` Adherence to the directions and instructions in the operation manual
Applications of the machine:

` Loading and unloading of ships using load lifting devices approved by the
machine manufacturer (e.g.: spreader operation for container handling)
` Cargo - grab operation
` Heavy lift operation
LHM 550_001 15
Product description
1.3 Conformity
1.3.1 Declaration of conformity
NOTE
4 A declaration of conformity is only issued for machines intended for use
within the EU.
1.3.2 State-of-the-art technology

At the time of delivery, this machine represents state-of-the-art technology. For
machines operated in the EU, the applicable standards are cited in the EU De
claration of Conformity.
Nevertheless, the machine can pose dangers if the safety notes in this opera
tion manual are not observed and implemented.
1.3.3 Type plate

The type plate is mounted at the entrance to the slewing platform on the inside
to the left. The details on the type plate are useful when ordering spare parts.
Figure 1 LHM type plate
16 LHM 550_001
Product description
1.4 Appropriate use
DANGER
Inappropriate use can lead to life-threatening injuries, severe material
damage and invalidation of the guarantee.
4 Only use the machine to carry out the operations listed and described in
this operating manual.
NOTE
4 The capabilities of the machine depend on the supplied equipment, which
is documented in the machine licence.
4 Any other use that is not described shall be regarded as inappropriate
use.
Appropriate use of the machine relies:

` on observance of the relevant instructions for the operation modes de
scribed in the operation manual.
` on adherence to the applicable national and international safety regu
lations.
` on observance of all safety regulations in this operation manual.
` on all the necessary safety devices being present and in good working
order.
` on the operating conditions defined in this operation manual being adhe
red to.
` on all maintenance and inspection work being carried out using the speci
fied fuels and lubricants.
LHM 550_001 17
Product description
1.5 Inappropriate use
DANGER
Inappropriate use can lead to life-threatening injuries, severe material
damage and invalidation of the guarantee.
4 Only use the machine to carry out the operations listed and described in
this operating manual.
NOTE
4 The capabilities of the machine depend on the supplied equipment, which
is documented in the machine licence.
4 Any other use that is not described shall be regarded as inappropriate
use.
Use of the machine is regarded as inappropriate where:

` the machine is started up without an acceptance test, if one is stipulated
by national legislation.
` the machine is started up by persons who are not authorised by the ope
rating company.
` the machine is started up without the requisite training and knowledge of
the operation manual.
` the machine is started up without the prescribed safety devices.
` the machine is started up without a valid load chart and travelling window.
` the machine is started up when the operation manual is incomplete or
unreadable.
` structural modifications have been carried out which affect operational
safety or have been carried out without the written consent of the manu
facturer.
` work is carried out in any way which endangers operational safety.
` persons are transported without using a specially authorised operation
mode.
` fastened loads are pulled loose using slack rope or by operating the sle
wing gear or luffing gear.
` a load is dragged on the ground.
` spare parts or consumables are fitted or used which are not original Lieb
herr products or approved by the manufacturer.
` the machine is subjected to overload, particularly beyond the tilting limit.
` the machine is started and operated in locations subject to explosion ha
zards (including locations where the atmosphere is only rarely or briefly
subject to explosion hazards).
` the machine is used in assembly mode (e.g. when laying down the
boom).
` attached loads are moved outside the travelling window.
` the load curve or the factory-fitted safety device are bypassed or modi
fied.
` work is carried out or loads are moved with a modified counterweight.
` the machine is driven on soft, yielding ground, or on ground that is unable
to support the prevailing axle loads.
18 LHM 550_001
Product description
` the machine is driven on rough, uneven ground (terrain).

` the machine is used as a towing vehicle.
` the machine is manoeuvred without a banksman.
` the prescribed maintenance and inspection operations are not adhered
to.
LHM 550_001 19
Product description
1.6 Technical description
1.6.1 Overall machine
Figure 2 Main components
1 Tower cabin
2 Tower
3 Luffing cylinders
4 Pressure storage
5 Slewing platform
6 Undercarriage
7 Slewing platform cabin*
8 Boom
20 LHM 550_001
Product description
1.6.2 Undercarriage
Figure 3 Undercarriage
1 Outrigger
2 Manhole
3 Rear ascent
4 Switch Cabinet X5
5 Slip ring unit
6 Wheel set
7 Emergency exit
8 Support pad
9 Additional wheel set*
10 Front ascent
11 Tank filler neck
LHM 550_001 21
Product description
1.6.3 Boom
Figure 4 Boom
1 Boom cable drum*

2 Boom support
3 Boom pulleys
4 Rope rest device
5 Pivot point luffing cylinder
6 Boom handrail
7 Boom walkway
8 Rope rest device
22 LHM 550_001
Product description
1.6.4 Slewing platform
Figure 5 Overview of slewing platform
1 Machinery house
2 Centre part
3 Winch compartment
LHM 550_001 23
Product description
1.6.5 Slewing platform - machinery house
Figure 6 Slewing platform - machinery house

1 Water air cooler
2 Battery compartment
3 Cooling water expansion tank
4 Exhaust system
5 Water air cooler
6 Slewing platform entrance
7 Distributor gearbox
8 Diesel engine
24 LHM 550_001
Product description
1.6.6 Slewing platform middle section
Figure 7 Slewing platform middle section
1 Switch cabinet room

2 Tower steps
3 Switch cabinet room ventilation filter
4 Service doors
5 Hydraulic tank
LHM 550_001 25
Product description
1.6.7 Slewing platform winch compartment
Figure 8 Slewing platform winch compartment
1 Heavy load - drive side*

2 Closing winch
3 Normal load - drive side
4 Guy winch*
5 Counterweights (number depends on type)
6 Ropes (closing ropes*)
7 Pendant ropes*
26 LHM 550_001
Product description
1.6.8 Slewing platform cabin*
Figure 9 Slewing platform cabin

1 Right master switch
2 Control panel X25 / X26
3 Windscreen wiper
4 Roof window
5 Wiper cleaning agent filler neck
6 Safety lever
7 Left master switch
8 Windscreen wiper
9 Spirit level
10 Litronic screen
LHM 550_001 27
Product description
1.6.9 Tower cabin
Figure 10 Tower cabin
1 Emergency descent device
2 Windscreen wiper (top)
3 Fire protection hood
4 Emergency descent equipment
5 First aid cabinet
6 Fire detection and extinguishing control unit*
7 Operator´s seat
8 Windscreen wiper (front)
10 Spirit level
11 Litronic screen
12 Video monitoring screen
28 LHM 550_001
Product description
13 Folding seat
14 Safety lever
16 Control panels X25/X26/X27/X28
17 Video monitoring control unit
18 Radio
19 Wiper cleaning agent filler neck
20 Air conditioning*
LHM 550_001 29
Product description
1.7 Technical data
1.7.1 Supporting base
Figure 11 Supporting base
LHM 550
Supporting base A X B 13,5m x 13,5m
Additional supporting base* -
1.7.2 Eye level tower cabin
Figure 12 Eye level tower cabin
LHM 550
Eye level tower cabin C 23.9m
30 LHM 550_001
Product description
1.7.3 Outreach
Figure 13 Maximum / minimum outreach
LHM 550
Maximum outreach D 48m
Minimum outreach E 11m
LHM 550_001 31
Product description
1.7.4 Lifting height
Figure 14 Lifting heights
LHM 550
Max. lifting height at max. outreach F 29,3m
Lifting height under quay G 15m
Max. lifting height at min. outreach H 45m
1.7.5 Tower extension*
LHM 550
Tower extension 4800mm
Add the height of the tower extension to the following heights:

` Maximum lifting height
` Eye level tower cabin
32 LHM 550_001
Product description
1.7.6 Fuel tank
LHM 550
Max. diesel tank capacity undercarriage 13000l
1.7.7 Hydraulic tank
LHM 550
Max. hydraulic oil tank capacity 2450l
1.7.8 Diesel engine
Engine type MAN D2842 LE103

Number of cylinders 12
Cubic capacity 21930ccm³
Power 670kW
NOTE
4All other information can be found in the supplied original MAN
engine manual.
LHM 550_001 33
Product description
1.7.9 Environmental conditions
Ambient temperature -20 / +45°C

Ambient temperature Russia -25 / +45°C
Low temperature package* -30 / +45°C
Relative humidity 97%
Max. lateral inclination in travelling mode without load 2%
Max. incline in travelling mode without load 5%
Max. wind speed when machine not in use 42m/s
Max. wind speed in use See load chart
Max. wind speed in travelling mode See load chart
1.7.10 Noise emissions
LHM 550
Guaranteed sound power level LWA 108,2db(A)
Guaranteed sound pressure level in cabin LPA 65.7db(A)
1.7.11 Vibrations
Vibrations affecting the operator's upper limbs 2.5m/s²

Vibrations affecting the operator's entire body 0.5m/s²
34 LHM 550_001
Product description
1.7.12 Electrical system
Generator with 4-rope grab and spreader with motor grab, load magnet device, etc.
Voltage 230 / 400V 230 / 400V
Nominal output 65KVA** 200KVA**
Frequency 50 / 60Hz 50 / 60Hz
Phases 3 + N + PE 3 + N + PE
Batteries
Voltage 24V
Battery voltage 12V
Battery capacity 170Ah
Auxiliary supply Supply Crane-internal

Voltage 208 / 415 / 480 +/-20V 230 / 400V
Nominal output 25KVA / 37KVA** 25KVA / 37KVA**
Frequency 50 / 60Hz 50 / 60Hz
Phases 3 + PE 3 + N + PE
Main power supply* LHM 550

Voltage 400 / 440V
Frequency 50 / 60Hz
Phases 3 + PE
** Customer-specific adaptation
LHM 550_001 35
Product description
1.7.13 Wheel sets
Figure 15 Driven and non-driven wheel set
1 Tyre
2 Rim
3 Hydraulic motor
1.7.14 Tyres
Manufacturer Continental
Type 285/70 R19.5
Air pressure 10bar
Number per wheel set 4
Weight each including rim 80kg
Weight each including rim (foamed*) 165kg
NOTE
4 Foamed tyres* are identified with a yellow sign.
36 LHM 550_001
Product description
1.8 Safety devices
In both standard and optional configurations, the safety devices include:

` Lighting
` Emergency lighting
` Emergency stop
` Limit switches
` Litronic control system, monitor
` Safety lever
` Fire extinguishers
` Fire detection and extinguishing system
` Fire protection hood
` Acoustic signalling transmitters
` Rear-view mirror
` Hand rails and anti-fold mechanisms
` Operation manual
` Video monitoring
` Battery main switch
1.8.1 Lighting
The machine lighting includes:

` Interior lighting
` Exterior lighting
S Work floodlights
S Position lights
S Floodlights
S Heli-lights*
S Signal lights
` Vehicle lighting*
1.8.2 Emergency lighting
NOTE
4 The emergency lighting remains active for 10 minutes after the machine is
turned off.
LHM 550_001 37
Product description
1.8.3 Limit switches
To avoid exceeding the permitted outreach or lifting height/depth, limit switches

stop movement.
u Raise the hoisting gear until movement is stopped automatically.

w Hoisting gear turns off.
w The hoisting gear can no longer be raised.
w The hoisting gear can only be lowered.
u Raise/lower the luffing gear until movement is stopped automatically.

w Luffing gear turns off.
w The luffing gear can no longer be raised/lowered.
w Move the luffing gear in the opposite direction.
1.8.4 Litronic control system, monitor

The Litronic control system is, or can be, equipped with the following safety-en
hancing operation modes which are displayed on the monitor where appro
priate.
` Electronic load moment limiter
` Wind speed
` Diagonal pull indicator*
` Anti-collision system*
` DACS (Dynamic Anti Collision System)*
` Cycoptronic*
` Inclination display (automatic support)*
See also chapter: Operation (operation modes) and the chapter: Controls,
Monitor for more information.
1.8.5 Safety lever
See chapter: Operation, Safety lever
1.8.6 Fire extinguishers

Four fire extinguishers are provided in the machine as standard.
(See chapter: Safety, Procedure in the event of fire, Firefighting with the fire
extinguisher)
` Slewing platform front
` Slewing platform middle section
` Slewing platform cabin
` Tower cabin
NOTE
4 Fire extinguishers are subject to national regulations and must be
replaced by the operating company periodically or when necessary.
38 LHM 550_001
Product description
1.8.7 Fire detection and extinguishing system
See chapter: Operation, Fire detection and extinguishing system
1.8.8 Fire protection hood
The fire protection hood is usually located in the tower cabin. Regarding the
position of the fire protection hood, refer to the chapter: Product description,
Technical description, Tower cabin .
NOTE
4 Information on use of the fire protection hood can be found in the
additional documentation supplied.
1.8.9 Acoustic signalling transmitters
The acoustic signalling devices include:

` Hooter on the undercarriage to signal travelling mode
` Standard hooter on the tower (activated via master switch)
` Fire alarm siren on the tower
` PA loudspeaker on the tower
1.8.10 Rear-view mirror
A total of 2 rear-view mirrors are mounted on the slewing platform.
Figure 16 Rear-view mirror
NOTE
4 To ensure optimum visibility, make sure the rear-view mirrors are always
clean.
LHM 550_001 39
Product description
1.8.11 Hand rails and anti-fold mechanisms
In the interest of safety, hand rails and anti-fold mechanisms are mounted on
the undercarriage, the tower and slewing platform.
Figure 17 Hand rails and anti-fold mechanisms
40 LHM 550_001
Product description
1.8.12 Operation manual
This operation manual contains important information about safety and what to
do in dangerous situations (see User Guide and chapter: Safety).
NOTE
4 A complete copy of the operation manual must always be kept ready to
hand in every cabin of the machine.
1.8.13 Video monitoring
The following cameras are attached for monitoring:

` Boom head camera
` Machinery room cameras*
` Switch cabinet room camera*
` Reversing camera*
LHM 550_001 41
Product description
1.8.14 Battery main switch
Figure 18 Battery main switch LHM 550
1 Battery main switch

2 Batteries
42 LHM 550_001
Product description
1.8.15 Location of the emergency stop button
Emergency stop
Figure 19 Emergency stop aggregate
Figure 20 Emergency stop switch cabinet room
LHM 550_001 43
Product description
Figure 21 Emergency stop winch
Figure 22 Emergency stop undercarriage ladder + switch cabinet undercar

riage X5
44 LHM 550_001
Product description
Figure 23 Emergency stop undercarriage front, rear
LHM 550_001 45
Product description
46 LHM 550_001
2
2
Safety
2. Safety
Your safety as machine operator or maintenance personnel is of utmost priority.
Many situations, problems or malfunctions occurring on the machine can pose a
serious safety risk.
u Familiarise yourself with measures to prevent and protect against the

resulting hazards.
This chapter provides information on

` Meaning and location of symbols and icons used on the machine and in
this operation manual
` Requisite protective equipment for operating and maintenance personnel
` Demands placed upon the operating and maintenance personnel
` Dangers and risks posed to operating and maintenance personnel
NOTE
4 Special handling and situation-specific notes on safety are specified
where relevant in the following chapters of this operation manual and in
further sections of the documentation.
LHM 550_001 47
Safety
2.1 Areas of responsibility
2.1.1 Manufacturer
The manufacturer:
` is responsible for the technically safe condition of the machine supplied,
together with accessories and documentation.
` is aware of its duty to monitor the product and document all maintenance
and repair work carried out by Liebherr personnel.
` ensures that the machine is kept in an operational state by a worldwide
maintenance and repair service.
` runs a training centre and provides training for the owner's operating and
maintenance personnel as a service.
2.1.2 Owner
The owner
` ensures that the machine is operated and maintained by qualified per
sonnel only.
` checks that all individuals who come into contact with the machine are
fully qualified, and authorises them to work.
` specifies the skills and responsibilities of all those working with or near
the machine.
` provides all necessary protective equipment to individuals working with or
near the machine.
` regularly checks that personnel carry out their work in a safety-conscious
manner.
` is responsible for ensuring the safe condition of the machine.
` completely removes the machine from use upon the discovery of any
faults that may affect safety.
` performs inspections on the machine based on national regulations in
addition to the inspections stipulated by Liebherr.
` informs the manufacturer of any accident involving the machine leading
to serious injury or major material damage.
` allows Liebherr personnel unlimited access to the machine in order that
they may fulfil their duty to monitor the product.
` carefully and conscientiously carries out work planning for the machine.
` will not carry out any alterations on the machine without first consulting
the manufacturer.
` use only original Liebherr spare parts.
48 LHM 550_001
Safety
2.1.3 Machine operator
The machine operator

` have read and understood the operation manual.
` operates the machine for the purposes intended, within the limit values
specified in the load chart and in accordance with the setup and the ope
ration manual.
` wear protective clothing.
` reports to the owner any alteration to the machine that affects safety.
` halts operation immediately if safe operation is no longer possible.
the manufacturer.
2.1.4 Rigger
The rigger:
` is responsible for the correct selection and fitting/removal of the lifting
device on the load or rigging material.
` gives the approval to move and/or accompany the load.
2.1.5 Banksman
The banksman:
` conveys signals from the rigger to the machine operator.
` gives signals to the machine operator if he is the only person responsible.
2.1.6 Maintenance personnel
Maintenance personnel:
` maintain the machine to ensure that it remains in a safe and reliable con
dition.
` have read and understood the operation manual.
` perform all specified maintenance work.
the manufacturer.
LHM 550_001 49
Safety
2.2 Requirements to personnel
2.2.1 Machine operator
The machine operator:

` are of the statutory minimum age.
` is physically capable (adequate eyesight and hearing, quick reactions) of
safely operating the machine.
` is authorised to operate the machine.
` is capable of accurately estimating distances, heights and clearances.
` is trained: for this type of machine, in rigging and assisting, in using fire
extinguishing devices.
` is aware of the escape routes in the event of an emergency.
` do not suffer from any physical or psychological ailments that lower any
of the specified requirements.
` are not under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
2.2.2 Rigger
The rigger:
` is physically capable (adequate eyesight and hearing, quick reactions) of
safely using/moving lifting devices.
` is authorised to rig loads.
` is capable:
S of accurately estimating distances, heights and clearances
S of accurately estimating mass and load distribution
S of operating walkie-talkies and using them to give clear instructions
S of guiding the load and ensuring the safe movement of the load and
the machine.
` is trained:
S in attaching lifting devices
S in signalling and knows the signal signs
S in selecting the correct lifting device
S in securing against unexpected detachment
S in preventing damage to lifting devices
50 LHM 550_001
Safety
2.2.3 Banksman
The banksman:
` are physically capable (adequate eyesight and hearing, quick reactions).
` is authorised to give signal signs.
` is capable:
S of accurately estimating distances, heights and clearances
S of operating walkie-talkies and using them to give clear instructions
S of guiding the load and ensuring the safe movement of the load and
the machine
` is trained in signalling and knows the signal signs.
2.2.4 Maintenance personnel
Maintenance personnel:
` are physically capable (adequate eyesight and hearing, quick reactions).
` are familiar with the machine and the hazards.
` are familiar with all maintenance procedures and measures.
` are trained to perform maintenance duties, including on specialist equip
ment.
LHM 550_001 51
Safety
2.3 Personal protective equipment
Always wear tight-fitting protective clothing when operating, maintaining or com

missioning the machine, as well as the correct personal protective equipment
for the task in question.
WARNING
Loose clothing, scarf, open jackets or shirts with undone sleeves, jewellery
(e.g. rings, bracelets, chains, earrings, etc.)!
Getting stuck in, caught up in or pulled into moving machine parts.
4 Loose clothing, scarf, open jackets or shirts with undone sleeves,
jewellery (e.g. rings, bracelets, chains, earrings, etc.)!
The personal protective equipment may comprise:
Safety helmet, if head injuries can be expected due to:

` collision
` swinging, falling, toppling or flying objects
` long, loose hair
Safety goggles, if eye injuries are possible due to:

` corrosive or pressurised fluids
` loose flying parts
Ear protectors, if the sound level is liable to exceed 90 dB(A)
Breathing mask, in the event of health-threatening gases, steam, vapours or

accumulations of dust in the working environment
Protective gloves, if hand injuries are possible due to:

` Burns
` pointed or sharp objects
` corrosive or pressurised fluids
Safety shoes, if foot injuries are possible due to:

` collision or trapping
` stepping on pointed or sharp objects
` falling, toppling or rolling objects
Reflective coating, (reflective or signal coloured), if prompt recognition by

other personnel is important
Special protective clothing, where there is danger of burns, hypothermia,

chemical burns, stabbing or cutting injuries to the body
NOTE
4 You are responsible for wearing the necessary personal protective
equipment, ensuring it is regularly maintained, and also replacing
damaged and unsuitable pieces of protective equipment!
52 LHM 550_001
Safety
2.4 Work area
In accordance with the EU Machinery Directive, the following guidelines have

been laid down for the operation of the machine:
Required operating personnel: one machine operator
Prescribed work area: slewing platform cabin* or tower cabin
Guiding personnel: one additional person
While the machine is in operation

` no one other than the machine operator may be on the machine.
` the machine operator must remain in the operator's cab at all times when
a load is attached to the ropes.
NOTE
4 Operate controls exclusively from the operator`s seat.
4 Operating any controls through the open cab doors is expressly
prohibited!
Prerequisites for a safe working area:

` Keep the operator's cab clean and tidy (empty ashtray regularly, place
drinks exclusively in holders provided, etc.)
` Do not place newspapers or other objects on the control panels.
` Do not keep tools in the operators cab.
` Articles of clothing, items of protective equipment or personnel effects
must not hinder access to the cab or the operation of the machine.
` Keep the entrance to the operator's cab clean and free from snow and
ice and any other obstructions.
` Keep all screens and rear view mirrors of the machine clean and free of
condensation and ice.
LHM 550_001 53
Safety
2.5 Danger zone

The danger zone is the area surrounding the machine, in which people can pos
sibly be injured by:
` working movements of the machine
` a swinging or falling load
` optional equipment on the machine
Figure 24 LHM 320 - 600 danger zone
I Working area at maximum outreach (metres)

II Safety area (metres)
Area LHM 320 LHM 400 LHM 500 LHM 600 (G)
I 43 48 51 58 (50)
II 53 58 61 68 (60)
WARNING
Entering the danger zone during crane operation!
Life-threatening safety risk.
4 Erect warning signs outside the danger zone.
4 Inform machine operator before entering the danger zone.
4 Passing below a suspended load is forbidden.
NOTE
4 Persons must not be present in the danger zone during crane operation.
Persons in the operators cabin are excepted from this.
54 LHM 550_001
Safety
2.6 Safety signs on the machine
WARNING
Noncompliance with the safety signs on the machine!
High safety risk for all persons involved.
4 Constantly check safety signs to ensure they are complete and legible.
4 Immediately replace missing or illegible safety signs with new, original
ones.
4 Observe safety notes and information.
NOTE
4 Safety signs in the relevant national language must be present, otherwise
they must be ordered from LIEBHERR.
Figure 25 Overview of machine safety signs
LHM 550_001 55
Safety
Figure 26 Overview of slewing platform safety signs
Figure 27 Battery and slip ring unit safety signs
56 LHM 550_001
Safety
2.7 Safety signs
Important safety signs are fitted to the machine. If they are not observed, death
or serious injury can result.
WARNING
Missing, damaged or illegible safety signs!
Severe injury and death.
4 Constantly check safety signs to ensure they are complete and legible.
4 Immediately replace missing or illegible safety signs with new, original
ones.
4 When using the machine in a different country, safety signs in the
appropriate language must be requested from the manufacturer.
2.7.1 Meaning of the safety signs
The safety signs are divided into three main groups of different shapes and co
lours:
Fire protection signs:

` are square and have red as the signal colour.
` draw attention to equipment and information needed in case of fire.
Fire extinguishers
Fire extinguishers
Fire detector
LHM 550_001 57
Safety
Prohibition signs:
` are circular and have a red signal colour
` are located wherever a potentially dangerous action is prohibited
No fire, naked flames or smoking
No access for unauthorised personnel
Pedestrians forbidden
No persons with pacemakers
Do not switch
58 LHM 550_001
Safety
Warning signs:
` are triangular and have yellow as the signal colour
` draw attention to equipment and circumstances in order to warn of po
tential injury and/or danger to life.
Danger area
Dangerous electrical voltage
Danger: suspended load
Dangerous drive units
Danger of being drawn in
Danger: hot surface
LHM 550_001 59
Safety
Danger: slippery surface
Danger of falling
Danger of stumbling
Danger of crushing
Danger of crushing
Danger of being drawn in (hands)
Danger from batteries
60 LHM 550_001
Safety
Danger from non-ionising electromagnetic radiation
Danger of rolling over
Danger from ropes
Danger of crushing (feet)
Danger from pressure reservoir
Danger of sepsis
LHM 550_001 61
Safety
Mandatory signs:
` are round and have blue as the signal colour
` relate to protective equipment that must be worn to prevent physical in
jury
General mandatory signs
Wear helmet
Wear ear protection
Wear face protection
Wear hand protection
Wear foot protection
Use safety harness
62 LHM 550_001
Safety
Machine-specific safety signs:

` do not belong to the three main safety sign groups
` vary in shape and colour
` contain particular information for the machine operator and other associa
ted personnel
Pressure indication for the wheel set tyres
Access for one person only
Escape route
Maintenance door
Additional sign; keep distance
` This sign is used in combination with another safety hazard.
Additional sign; see operation manual
` This sign is used in combination with another safety hazard.
Example:
` Keep distance from hot surfaces
LHM 550_001 63
Safety
USA LHM special signs:

` do not belong to the three main safety sign groups
` vary in shape and colour
` contain both symbols and text and are self-explanatory
` are only affixed to machines destined for the USA
` contain particular information for the machine operator and other associa
ted personnel
Examples of LHM signs in the USA:
Danger from moving parts
Danger from high pressure lines and hoses
Danger from hot surfaces
Do not climb on or enter machine
Danger from swinging load
64 LHM 550_001
Safety
2.8 Hazards
2.8.1 Mechanical action
WARNING
Mechanical actions from moving machine parts when machine is in use!
4 Observe handling and situation-specific safety notes.
NOTE
Observe the following safety notes:
4 Wear requisite personal protective equipment.
4 Only work on non-moving parts.
Examples of mechanical actions:
Standing under a suspended load.
Danger of being drawn in by moving drive units or machine parts.
Danger of falling when working without safety gear.
Danger of crushing due to unsecured components such as doors or sliding ele

ments.
FIRST AID
u Protection/personal safety
` Identify - what is the nature of the emergency?
` Think - what are the dangers for the injured party or the helper?
` Act - make the situation safe.
u Emergency call
u Emergency life-saving measures

` Recovery position
` Cardiac massage, artificial respiration and defibrillation
` Staunch bleeding, shock prevention
u Additional first aid
LHM 550_001 65
Safety
2.8.2 Hydraulic energy
WARNING
Escaping hydraulic oil under high pressure!
Injuries to skin, destruction of tissue and sepsis.
NOTE
4 Repairs to hydraulic systems must exclusively be carried out by qualified
technicians with specialised knowledge and experience of hydraulics.
4 Before starting work ensure that the whole system is depressurised.
4 Never attempt to locate the leakage point with your hand or other part of
the body.
4 Replace damaged hydraulic components immediately with original
Liebherr spare parts.
Examples of hydraulic energy:
Tissue damage from leaks.
Sepsis from hydraulic oil entering bloodstream.
FIRST AID
u Emergency call

` Recovery position

` Gently cover injured area(s) with a sterile anti-bacterial dressing
.
` Rinse eyes with pure drinking water.
66 LHM 550_001
Safety
2.8.3 Burns
CAUTION
Contact with hot surfaces and consumables!
Burns or scalding.
NOTE
4 Always wear suitable protective gloves when working on hot components.
4 Only carry out work on the machine when it is cool and stopped.
Examples of burns and scalding:

Burns from contact with the entire drive system.
Scalding from steam exiting from the cooling system or hydraulic oil from the
drive system.
FIRST AID
u Emergency call

` Recovery position
With first-degree burns (redness of the skin):

` Cool the affected body part by rinsing with cold fresh water.
` Gently cover injured area(s) with a sterile anti-bacterial dressing.
With second-degree burns (blisters on the skin):

` Cool the affected body part by rinsing with cold fresh water.
With third-degree burns (charring of the skin and tissue):

LHM 550_001 67
Safety
2.8.4 Chemical burns
CAUTION
Contact with corrosive consumables!
Acids and bases cause chemical burns to skin and tissue, and blindness if they
come in contact with the eye.
NOTE
4 When working with acid always wear suitable safety goggles or face
protection, protective clothing and gloves.
4 Acids and bases will damage clothing.
Examples of chemical burns:
Chemical burns from handling acidic consumables.
Chemical burns from leaking battery acid.
FIRST AID
u Emergency call

` Recovery position

` Removing clothing from injured body parts.
` Rinse injured areas with drinking water.
` Gently cover the area with a sterile anti-bacterial dressing.
68 LHM 550_001
Safety
2.8.5 Snow and ice loads
DANGER
Snow or ice on the machine!
Structural breakdown.
WARNING
Falling chunks of snow and ice!
4 Do not operate if boom is covered in snow or ice.
NOTE
4 Place boom in parked position and carefully remove large deposits of
snow and ice.
4 Remove snow and ice from all sensitive parts such as limit switches,
guides, etc.
4 Snow and ice loads increase the boom weight and the area exposed to
the wind.
LHM 550_001 69
Safety
2.8.6 Lightning strike
WARNING
Electric shock from lightning!
Coming into contact with a direct or indirect current flow caused by a voltage
flashover or step voltage can be fatal.
Fall hazard when working at heights.
It can also cause a total failure of the control system, mechanical damage,
damage to the electronics or to local welding spots on supports.
NOTE
Liebherr recommends:
When the machine is the following locations, lay down the boom before
formation of a thunderstorm:
4 Vicinity of banks
4 Exposed, open locations
The closed machine operator's cab acts as a Faraday cage. The charge is
channelled through the machine and into the ground.
In heavy thunderstorms with lightning:
u Set crane operation.
u Lay down boom (see section 'Operation, Laying down the boom').
u Remain outside of the danger zone of the machine and keep away from
large metallic objects.
Measures to take after a lightning strike on the machine has been obser
ved or is suspected:
u Thoroughly inspect the machine paying particular attention to any damaged

cables, hoses and ropes.
u Check the operational capability of the control system.
u Slowly move the slewing gear and listen for any unusual noises.
u Inspect the boom for damage.
u Contact Liebherr service department.
70 LHM 550_001
Safety
FIRST AID
u Emergency call

` Recovery position

` (For further information see 'Safety, How to respond in the event of a cur
rent transfer')
LHM 550_001 71
Safety
2.8.7 Danger of fire and explosion
DANGER
Highly flammable consumables, resulting gas mixture and electric
charge/discharge!
Danger of fire and explosion.
General safety notes to prevent danger of fire and explosion:

` Do not use any flammable fluids to clean the machine.
` Do not carry any flammable fluids on the machine other than in the tanks
provided for this purpose.
` Only store small amounts of fuel or highly flammable or self-igniting ma
terial at the site where the machine is being used.
` Do not store cleaning cloths in the area of the central power unit and re
gularly remove flammable deposits such as puddles of oil, ash and
waste paper.
` Regularly check that protective covers, cable and hose guides are com
plete and in working order. Secure loose cables and ducts and protect
them from fraying.
` Check all lines, hoses and screw fittings of the hydraulic and fuel sys
tems regularly for leaks and possible damage. Repair leaks immediately
and replace any damaged components with original LIEBHERR spare
parts.
Safety notes on batteries and electrics:

` Smoking, naked flames and using electrical devices near batteries are
forbidden.
` An explosive detonating gas is produced when charging or discharging,
which burns explosively on contact with fire!
` Disconnect and remove all power supplies (batteries, auxiliary supply,
main power supply, etc.) when preserving the machine.
` Check the electrical system regularly for faults and damage (loose clam
ping connections, scorched or frayed cables, etc).
Safety notes on handling fuel:

` Switch off engine before fuelling.
` Smoking and using a naked flame are forbidden.
` Ensure that no one is inside the cab during the fuelling procedure.
` Refuel the machine exclusively in a well ventilated area.
` Electrostatic discharges may occur between the machine and the fuelling
unit in the diesel tank filler neck. Where possible, connect the machine to
the fuelling unit earthing.
` Position the fuelling unit hose to prevent fuel from leaking out.
` Only restart the machine when the tank cover is securely fitted and
locked, all passage doors are locked and no personnel are on the ma
chine.
72 LHM 550_001
Safety
2.8.8 Poisoning and suffocation
CAUTION
Inadequate ventilation or fresh air!
Poisoning or suffocation.
4 Ensure adequate ventilation in the cabin.
4 Use breathing apparatus when working with hazardous materials.
Examples of poisoning and dangers of asphyxiation:
Engine exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide and other hazardous gases.
If the machine is used in areas where hazardous materials are present, contact
with hazardous gases is a possibility.
The refrigerant from the air conditioning system circuit displaces the oxygen in
the air.
FIRST AID
u Emergency call

` Recovery position
LHM 550_001 73
Safety
2.8.9 Environmental hazard
CAUTION
Uncontrolled discharge of fuel, oils, cleaning agents, coolant, etc.!
Contamination of soil and water. Considerable environmental damage.
4 If the machine leaks, immediately collect the escaping consumable and
seal the leak.
4 Bind any spilled consumable with binding agent or neutralise it with
suitable agents.
4 When draining or catching fluids use suitable containers (filling capacity
and resistant to chemicals).
4 Carry out cleaning work on firm well-drained ground.
4 Observe the national and international environmental protection
regulations for the disposal of fuels or waste.
4 Notify the emergency services and authorities if large amounts of
substances that are harmful to the environment escape.
Examples of environmental hazards:
Leakages
Refilling consumables incorrectly
74 LHM 550_001
Safety
2.8.10 Electromagnetic influence
WARNING
Electromagnetic influence when the machine is deployed near transmitting
stations, radar stations or directional radio systems!
Malfunctions or failure of electronic implants (pacemakers).
Malfunction or failure of the control system.
4 If electromagnetic interference with the control system is suspected, set
crane operation.
Examples of electromagnetic influence:
Malfunction or failure of the control system if operating the machine near trans
mitters, directional radio systems or radar stations.
Environmental influence through the use of electromagnetic rigging material or

integrated radio devices.
LHM 550_001 75
Safety
2.8.11 Exposure to wind
DANGER
Non-compliance with permitted wind speeds during crane operation!
Danger of tilting, personal injury and material damage.
4 The machine operator must be aware of the permitted wind speed (load
chart).
4 Stop work as soon as possible if the maximum permitted wind speed is
exceeded (higher than the load chart specification).
4 Lay down and secure the load and place the machine in the parked
position.
NOTE
Exposure to wind (from the front, from the rear and from the side):
4 acts like an additional load on the hook.
4 increases the danger of tilting.
4 may cause the load to become unstable resulting in damage or
destruction of the boom.
4 reduces the stability of the machine.
4 increases the swing radius.
4 generates additional diagonal pull.
NOTE
4 An anemometer on the boom head provides an accurate indication on the
monitor of the wind speed at this height. (height of boom head)
Figure 28 Exposure to wind from the front
76 LHM 550_001
Safety
Figure 29 Exposure to wind from the rear
Figure 30 Exposure to wind from the side
LHM 550_001 77
Safety
Parked position at wind speeds up to 50 m/s
u Place machine parallel to the undercarriage (0° or 180°).
u Detach rigged load and lay down and secure lifting device on the ground.
u Place the boom in the following position:
Type Minimum radius (m) Maximum radius (m)

LHM 550 (boom 48m) 15 45
LHM 550 (boom 54m) 20 42
NOTE
4 Lay the boom on the ground or in a suitable location in wind speeds
exceeding 42 m/s (see section 'Operation/Laying down the boom').
DANGER
In wind speeds exceeding 50 m/s!
Toppling of machine.
4 Lay the boom on the ground or in a suitable location (see section
'Operation/Laying down the boom).
4 Secure machine against slipping/sliding.
78 LHM 550_001
Safety
If machine is not in use, it is possible to estimate the wind force and wind speed
on both land and sea using the following tables:
Wind force Wind speed Description of the conditions at sea

Beau Designa Knots Wave
fort tion height
(m)
0 Calm 0 0 Mirror-smooth sea.
1 Light air 2 0,1 Small flaky-looking ripples without white crests.
2 Light 5 0,2 Small, short waves. Glassy, non-breaking crests.
breeze
3 Gentle 9 0,6 Small, short waves. Crests begin to break. Mostly transparent
breeze foam. Occasional small, white foam heads.
4 Moderate 13 1 Small, longer waves. Many have white crests.
breeze
5 Fresh 19 2 Moderate longer waves. Widespread white crests. Isolated froth.
breeze
6 Strong 24 3 Large waves. Crests break and leave large white areas of foam.
breeze Some froth.
7 Near gale 30 4 Sea heaps up. White foam begins to streak in wind direction.
8 Gale 37 5,5 Moderately high waves with considerably long crests. Crest edges
begin to froth. Foam covers the surface in pronounced streaks in
the wind direction.
9 Severe 44 7 High waves. Thick strips of foam in the wind direction. Wave crests
gale roll over one another. See begins to 'roll'. Froth can affect visibility.
10 Storm 52 9 Very high waves with long breaking crests. The resulting foam lies
on the surface in thick white streaks in the wind direction. Sea is
white from foam. Strong intermittent 'rolling' of the sea. Visibility af
fected by froth.
11 Violent 60 11,5 Exceptionally high waves (small and medium-sized ships are mo
storm mentarily hidden from view behind the waves). Sea is completely
white from foam, which streaks in the wind direction. Edges of the
wave crests turn to froth. Visibility limited by froth.
12 Hurricane <64 <14 Air filled with foam and froth. Sea completely white with froth. Visib
ility is extremely limited.
LHM 550_001 79
Safety
Wind force Wind speed Effects of the wind on land

Beau Designa m/s km/h mph
fort tion
0 Calm 0 - 0,2 1 <1 Smoke rises vertically.
1 Light air 0,3 - 1,5 1-5 1-3 Wind direction shown by smoke drift but not yet by wind
vanes.
2 Light 1,6 - 3,3 6 - 11 4-7 Wind felt on face; leaves rustle; vanes moved by wind.
breeze
3 Gentle 3,4 - 5,4 12 - 19 8 - 12 Leaves and small twigs in constant motion; wind ex
breeze tends light flag.
4 Moderate 5,5 - 7,9 20 - 28 13 - 18 Raises dust and loose paper; moves twigs and small
breeze branches.
5 Fresh 8 - 10,7 29 - 38 19 - 24 Small broadleaf trees begin to sway; white crests form
breeze on inland waters.
6 Strong 10,8 - 13,8 39 - 49 25 - 31 Large branches in motion; whistling heard in overhead
breeze power lines, umbrellas blown inside out.
7 Near gale 13,9 - 17,1 50 - 61 32 - 38 Trees in motion.
8 Gale 17,2 - 10,7 62 - 74 39 - 46 Wind breaks twigs off trees. Progress in the open is
severely impeded.
9 Severe 20,8 - 24,4 75 - 88 47 - 54 Slight structural damage (roof tiles and chimney covers,
gale etc. blown off)
10 Storm 24,5 - 28,4 89 - 102 55 - 63 Trees uprooted. Considerable structural damage occurs.
11 Violent 28,5 - 32,6 103 - 117 64 - 73 Widespread storm losses.
storm
12 Hurricane 32,7 - 36,9 118 - 133 >74 Severe devastation.
NOTE
4 As machine operator, keep up to date with the weather situation.
4 Take machine out of operation in unacceptably high wind speeds.
4 Take protective measures against storm losses (see section 'Operation,
Parked position).
80 LHM 550_001
Safety
2.9 Danger from electrical energy
WARNING
Electrical energy!
Severe injury, death.
4 Inform all personnel on the site where the machine is to be used about
the dangers of electrical voltage.
2.9.1 Overhead power lines
WARNING
Contact with a live overhead power line!
Electric shock, serious damage to property and personal injury.
4 Maintain safe distances. If safe distances can not be maintained,
overhead power line must be switched off by qualified personnel.
4 Maintain a safe distance as specified in national guidelines or by a
representative from the power supply company. If a safe distance cannot
be consistently maintained, do not make any changes to the conductor
routing yourself!
4 Inform the power supply company. The power supply company will then
take additional action to ensure work can continue safely (e.g. switch off
the line, re-route the conductor, etc.). The power supply company
representative will issue written approval for the safe operation of the
machine.
4 Pay attention to floor unevenness or wind that can reduce the distance to
the line.
4 Assign a banksman to observe the machine and the line, monitor the safe
distance and maintain continuous contact with the machine operator.
LHM 550_001 81
Safety
Figure 31 Overhead line tower
The safe distance depends on the nominal voltage of the overhead power line.
The table below lists the basic safe distances (in accordance with EN 50110,
Part 1, 2004).
w Familiarise yourself with national and local guidelines.
Safe distances (according to EN 50110, Part 1, 2004)
Nominal line voltage (kV) Safe distance X (mm)

<1 300
3 1120
6 1120
10 1150
15 1160
20 1220
30 1320
36 1380
45 1480
60 1630
70 1750
110 2000
132 3000
150 3000
220 3000
275 4000
380 4000
480 6100
700 8400
82 LHM 550_001
Safety
NOTE
4 Only the power supply company can provide exact information about the
nominal line voltage.
Dangerous situations with overhead power lines:
u Direct contact with a low voltage overhead power line (up to 1 kV)
w Current transfer to the machine.
w A dangerous voltage is applied to the machine.
w An earth leakage and resistance area (see section 'Safety, resistance
area') form around the machine.
u Direct contact with a high voltage overhead power line (from 1 kV upwards)
w An arc forms if the safe distance is not adhered to.
w A resistance area and earth leakage form around the machine.
NOTE
4 When a flashover with arcing occurs, it is possible that combustible
materials (e.g. weight load) will ignite.
u Direct contact with two different overhead power lines

w A short-circuit will occur.
w An arc forms (above 1 kW) if the safe distance is not adhered to.
u Overhead power line falls to the ground

NOTE
4 The protective devices of different national electricity grids react differently
in the event of a fault.
4 After a short circuit or an earth leakage never assume that an automatic
and permanent shut down will occur.
4 The machine or a torn-down overhead power line may therefore carry a
dangerous voltage and form a resistance area.
LHM 550_001 83
Safety
2.9.2 Underground lines
DANGER
Contact with a live underground line!
Electric shock, serious damage to property and personal injury.
4 Maintain a minimum safe distance of 1 m. If safe distances can not be
maintained, underground line must be switched off by qualified personnel.
NOTE
4 Live underground lines are insulated several times depending on their
voltage. The nominal line voltage cannot be easily determined.
4 Only the power supply company can provide exact information about the
nominal line voltage.
4 Immediately notify the power supply company of even the slightest
damage to the external shield.
Dangerous situations with underground lines:
u Damage to the insulation and/or contact with one or several underground

lines
w Strong arcing.
NOTE
4 The protective devices of different national electricity grids react differently
in the event of a fault.
4 After a short circuit or an earth leakage never assume that an automatic
and permanent shut down will occur.
4 The machine or a ripped-up underground line may therefore carry a
dangerous voltage and form a resistance area.
84 LHM 550_001
Safety
2.9.3 Resistance area
Figure 32 Resistance area
In the event of a current transfer to the machine, the current is distributed from
the point of ingress in the ground. The voltage decreases according to a funnel-
shaped curve - a resistance area is formed.
The extent of the resistance area depends on:

` Voltage
` Current
` Ground resistance
Step voltage in the resistance area:
If a person moves within the resistance area, a difference of potential, known as

the step voltage, forms between his feet.
The step voltage increases:

` the closer the person is to the place of power ingress.
` the greater the step length.
WARNING
Step voltage!
Depending on the insulating properties of his footwear, an electric shock is
created above a certain step voltage!
If the person falls to the ground, a potential drop immediately forms along his
body surpassing that of the step voltage - a life threatening current flows throug
his body!
4 See section 'Safety, How to respond in the event of a current transfer'.
4 Observe safety notes and information!
LHM 550_001 85
Safety
2.10 How to respond in the event of a current

transfer
WARNING
Incorrect procedure in event of current transfer to the machine!
Electric shock, serious injury, death.
Procedure in event of current transfer to the machine:
u Remain calm.
u Do no leave the cabin.

w Remaining in the cabin is relatively safe.
w Only leave the cabin in the event of immediate danger! (see section
'Safety, Leaving the machine in the event of a current transfer' and 'Lea
ving the machine in the event of fire')
u In the event of fire, alert the emergency services and the power supply com
pany. (see section 'Safety, How to respond in the event of a fire')
u If the Litronic control system is still functioning:

w Immediately move the machine out of the danger zone.
w Stop the machine as soon as a safe distance has been reached and any
arcing has stopped.
u Prevent anyone from entering the resistance area by establishing a sufficient

radius.
WARNING
Remaining in the resistance area!
Electric shock, serious injury, death.
86 LHM 550_001
Safety
2.10.1 Leaving the machine after an accident with a low

voltage line
NOTE
4 The nature of the accident (whether low or high voltage) determines the
manner in which the emergency exit from the machine is carried out as
well as the rescue and first aid procedures for affected individuals. If in
doubt, always assume that a high voltage accident has occurred!
u Never touch live parts of the machine (rope, load, support pads, etc) if you
are in contact with the ground.
u Jump in a direction that avoids any contact with live parts.
u Jump to a safe distance from the machine and land on both feet at the same
time.
u Never hold on to the machine or any live parts.
u When leaving the danger area, avoid any contact with metal objects.
FIRST AID
Rescuing a person from the danger zone (low voltage):
u Alert the emergency services and the relevant power supply company.
` Report an electrical accident.
` Request that the supply be shut off.
` State the scene of the accident.
` Describe the course of accident.
` State the number of injured persons.
` Give a name and telephone number (personnel data).
u Secure the scene of the accident, do not allow access to any unauthorised
persons.
` Avoid direct contact with the injured person.
` Only after contact with the live object has been broken is it safe to touch
the injured person and to move him/her out of the danger zone.
u Administer first aid (see also FIRST AID for burn injuries)
` In the event of apnoea, cardiac arrest or shock, immediately administer
artificial respiration, cardiac massage or shock prevention treatment.
` Alert the emergency services, or seek medical advice as quickly as pos
sible.
LHM 550_001 87
Safety
2.10.2 Leaving the machine after an accident with a high

voltage line
NOTE
4 The nature of the accident (whether low or high voltage) determines the
manner in which the emergency exit from the machine is carried out as
well as the rescue and first aid procedures for affected individuals. If in
doubt, always assume that a high voltage accident has occurred!
u Never touch live parts of the machine (rope, load, support pads, etc) if you
are in contact with the ground.
u Jump in a direction that avoids any contact with live parts.
u Jump to a safe distance from the machine and land on both feet at the same
time.
u Land on both feet at the same time with legs closed (do not straddle).
u Never hold on to the machine or any live parts.
u Leave the resistance area (see section 'Safety, Danger from electrical
energy'): Hop on both feet with both legs pressed together until the required
safe distance is reached.
u While hopping away, keep well clear of any live parts.
NOTE
4 Instead of hopping, you can also leave the resistance area by shuffling
with knees pressed together and the shoes rubbing against each other. It
is very important to maintain constant contact between the shoes and the
ground.
4 Never lift your shoes off the ground!
FIRST AID
Rescuing a person from the danger zone (high voltage):
u Alert the emergency services and the relevant power supply company.
` Report an electrical accident.
` Request that the supply be shut off.
` State the scene of the accident.
` Describe the course of accident.
` State the number of injured persons.
` Give a name and telephone number (personnel data).
u Secure a sufficiently wide area around the scene of the accident, do not al
low access to any unauthorised persons.
u Be aware of the resistance area.
88 LHM 550_001
Safety
u Rescue injured person from the danger zone:

` Only enter the danger zone after the shut-down of the line has been con
firmed by the power supply company.
` if possible only enter danger zone under the supervision of trained per
sonnel from the relevant power supply company.
u Administer first aid (see also FIRST AID for burn injuries)
` In the event of apnoea, cardiac arrest or shock, immediately administer
artificial respiration, cardiac massage or shock prevention treatment.
` Alert the emergency services, or seek medical advice as quickly as pos
sible.
NOTE
4 Always seek medical attention after electrical accidents. It is possible that
symptoms of an irregular heartbeat may be experienced some time after
the accident!
LHM 550_001 89
Safety
2.11 How to respond in the event of a fire

DANGER
Incorrect use of fire extinguishers and non-compliance with safety
instructions!
Severe injury, death.
NOTE
4 Intimately familiarise yourself with the fire extinguishing systems (fire
extinguishers, fire detection and extinguishing systems), their locations
and the number of systems.
4 Regularly inspect and service the systems referred to above.
Procedure in the event of fire:
u Switch off engine
u If a fire is detected automatically by a fire detection and extinguishing sys

tem, all prime movers are automatically shut down after 20 seconds, see
section 'Operation, Fire detection and extinguishing system'.
u If the machine operator is made aware of a fire by a warning on the monitor

or through any other means, he must manually trigger the fire extinguishing
system manually! (see section 'Operation, Fire detection and extinguishing
system)
u Request assistance via the PA system and alert the emergency services
(machines with combustion engines are equipped with the fire detection and
extinguishing system as standard, a warning hooter is activated automati
cally if any of the large number of sensors in the fire detection and extinguis
hing system detect a fire and an acoustic warning signal sounds on the
outside of the machine)
u Evacuate individuals from the danger zone and administer first aid if needed
(see 'Burn injuries' and 'Danger of fire and explosion')
u Only if there is no risk to your personal safety should you start to fight the
fire (fire extinguisher).
u If the fire detection and extinguishing system* extinguishes the fire, the area
can only be investigated once no escaping air sounds can be heard from the
generators.
u All doors to the affected area must remain closed after the fire is extinguis
hed.
u The area may only be entered after it is deemed safe by authorised firefigh
ters.
DANGER
Escaping fuel or oils in contact with hot parts.
Risk of fire restarting!
4 Observe safety notes.
90 LHM 550_001
Safety
2.11.1 Firefighting using a fire extinguisher
NOTE
4 Owner must organise, replace and check fire extinguishers in accordance
with national regulations.
u To fight the fire, remove the fire extinguisher from its mount on the machine
and prepare it for use. See section 'Product description, Safety devices, Fire
extinguishers' as well as 'Safety, Safety signs on the machine'.
u Locate the source of the fire and fight the fire with several short, targeted
bursts from the fire extinguisher. Spray the appropriate extinguishing agent
for the type of fire at the source of the fire. Maintain a safe distance!
u While fighting the fire, employees must alert the fire brigade and help to fight
the fire using extra fire extinguishers and suitable extinguishing agents.
NOTE
Burning hydraulic oil:
4 can only be successfully put out using the fire extinguisher at the very
start of the fire.
4 leads after a short time to a fully-fledged fire and to the total loss of the
machine.
Fire classes
Fire class A: Fires involving solid materials which leave a residue when burnt
(includes cable fires)
Fire class B: Fires involving fluids and liquefying materials (e.g. paraffin, diesel,
oils, etc.)
Fire class C: Fires involving gases (e.g. methane, butane, natural gas, etc.)
Fire class D: Fires involving metals
Incorrect Correct
LHM 550_001 91
Safety
Fight the fire with the wind behind

you
Extinguish the fire from the front to

the back and from the bottom to the
top
But: Extinguish dropping and liquid

fires from the top to the bottom
Do not use extinguishers in succes

sion but use several extinguishers at
the same time
Make sure that the fire does not re

ignite - always extinguish glowing
embers with water
Incorrect Correct
Do not put fire extinguishers back in

place after use - refill them
92 LHM 550_001
Safety
FIRST AID
See FIRST AID in case of burns.
2.11.2 Firefighting using the fire detection and extinguishing

system
See section 'Operation, Fire detection and extinguishing system'.
2.11.3 Leaving the machine in the event of a fire
See section 'Operation, Emergency exit'.
LHM 550_001 93
Safety
2.12 Hand signals
Hand signals:
` are used for communication purposes when there is visual contact bet
ween machine operator and banksman or other personnel.
` are clearly defined in national and international standards.
NOTE
4 All persons involved must decide among themselves which hand signals
are to be used.
The following overview comprises:

` Hand signals in accordance with BGV A8 (Germany)
` Hand signals in accordance with ASME/ANSI B30.5 (USA)
2.12.1 General hand signals in accordance with BGV A8
Caution, Start, Attention

` Hold right arm stretched vertically upwards. Palm of the hand faces for
wards.
Stop, Interruption
` Do not continue movement. Stretch out both arms to the side horizon
tally. Palms of the hands face forward.
94 LHM 550_001
Safety
Stop - Danger
` First stretch out both arms horizontally to the sides. Palms of the hands
face forward. Bend in and stretch out the arms alternately.
Lift
ward and makes a slow circling motion.
Lower
` Hold right arm downwards. Palm of the hand faces inwards and makes a
slow circling motion.
Slowly
` Stretch out right arm horizontally. Palm of the hand faces down and is
moved slowly up and down.
Depart
wards. Move the arm from side to side.
LHM 550_001 95
Safety
Approach
` Bend both arms. Palms of the hands face inwards. Wave in with the fore
arms.
Remove
` Bend both arms. Palms of the hands face outwards. Wave away with the
forearms.
Travel right (from the banksman's viewpoint)

` Lightly bend right arm while holding it out horizontally and move back and
forth sideways.
Travel left (from the banksman's viewpoint)

` Lightly bend left arm while holding it out horizontally and move back and
forth sideways.
Indicate distance reduction

` Hold both palms parallel and move them toward each other to indicate
the distance.
96 LHM 550_001
Safety
2.12.2 Special hand signals for lifting device

operations
Lift load slowly

` Bend right arm and hold upwards. Extended index finger points upwards.
Right hand makes small, circular movements. Stretch out the left hand
and hold it over the right hand.
Lower load slowly

` Hold right arm downwards. Extended index finger points downwards.
Hand makes small, circular movements. Hold left hand below it. Hand
surface faces upwards.
Lift boom section slowly

` Bend right arm. Thumb points upwards. Hold left hand above it.
Lower boom section slowly

` Bend right arm. Thumb points downwards. Hold left hand below it. Back
of the hand faces upwards.
LHM 550_001 97
Safety
Lift boom section and hold load

` Bend right arm. Thumb points upwards. Left hand makes a fist under the
right hand.
Lower boom section and hold load

` Bend right arm. Thumb points downwards. Left hand makes a fist under
the right hand.
Raise boom section and lower load

` Bend right arm. Thumb points upwards. Stretch out left arm. Index finger
points downwards. Hold left hand under right hand and rotate.
Lower boom section and lift load

` Bend right arm. Thumb points downwards. Bend left arm. Index finger
points upwards. Hold left hand under right hand and rotate.
Swing uppercarriage to the right

` Bend left arm and hold it up. Thumb points outwards in the direction of
rotation. Stretch out right arm downwards. Index finger points down
wards. Hand makes small, circular movements.
98 LHM 550_001
Safety
Swing uppercarriage to the left

` Bend right arm and hold it up. Thumb points outwards in the direction of
rotation. Stretch out left arm downwards. Index finger points downwards.
Hand makes small, circular movements.
Open grab
` Stretch out right arm horizontally. Hold hand downwards with fingers half-
open.
Close grab
` Stretch out right arm horizontally. Close hand into a fist.
LHM 550_001 99
Safety
2.12.3 Hand signals for lifting device operations in accord

ance with ASME/ANSI B30.5
Lift load
` Bend right arm and hold upwards. Outstretched index finger points up
wards. Right hand makes small, circular movements.
Lower load
` Hold right arm downwards. Outstretched index finger points downwards.
Right hand makes small, circular movements.
Use main winch

` Tap safety helmet with fist. Then give further hand signals.
Use auxiliary winch

` Bend right arm and hold upwards. Tap underside of elbow with left hand.
Then give further hand signals.
100 LHM 550_001

Safety
Lift boom section

` Stretch out right arm horizontally. Thumb points upwards. Remaining
fingers are closed.
Lower boom section

` Stretch out right arm horizontally. Thumb points downwards. Remaining
fingers are closed.
Move slowly
` Give the hand signal for the desired movement with one hand. Hold the
other hand above/below. (e.g.: Lift load)
Raise boom section and lower load

` Stretch out right arm horizontally. Thumb points upwards. Stretch and
bend the remaining fingers alternately for as long the load has to be lo
wered.
LHM 550_001 101

Safety
Lower boom section and lift load

` Stretch out right arm horizontally. Thumb points downwards. Stretch and
bend the remaining fingers alternately for as long the load has to be lo
wered.
Swing
` Stretch out right/left arm horizontally. Palm of the hand faces down,
extended fingers point in the direction of rotation.
Stop
` Stretch out one arm horizontally. Palm of the hand faces downwards.
Swing arm back and forth horizontally.
Emergency stop
` Stretch out both arms horizontally. Palm of the hands facing downwards.
Swing both arms back and forth horizontally.
102 LHM 550_001

Safety
Drive
` Stretch one arm out in front. Palm of the hand faces forwards and is
slightly raised. Make a movement in the direction of travel with the open
hand.
Shut down and secure machine

` Hook hands in front of body.
Drive with both crawler chains (when using a machine with crawler chains)
` Hold both fists in front of body. Indicate direction of travel with circular
motions (forwards or backwards).
Drive with one crawler chain (when using a machine with crawler chains)
` Bend arm with fist raised on the side of the stopped crawler chain. Bend
other arm in front of body. Indicate direction of travel via circular move
ments with fist (forwards or backwards).
LHM 550_001 103

Safety
Extend boom (machines with telescopic arm)

` Hold both fists in front of body. Thumbs facing outwards.
Retract boom (machines with telescopic arm)

` Hold both fists in front of body. Thumbs point towards each other.
Retract boom (machines with telescopic arm)

` One-handed signal: Hold one fist in front of chest. Thumb points to chest.
Extend boom (machines with telescopic arm)

` One-handed signal: Hold one fist in front of chest. Thumb facing out
wards.
104 LHM 550_001

3
3
Operating elements
3. Operating elements
3.1 General
This section
` provides information on the configuration of the operating elements
` specifies the designation of each element
LHM 550_001 105

Operating elements
3.2 Control station
The LHM is equipped with the tower cabin and just one control station as stan
dard. Included with the optional slewing platform cabin is another control station
in either standard or reduced layout (with just one master switch and control
panel X25 exclusively).
Figure 33 Tower cabin control station
1 Litronic screen
2 Video monitoring
3 Control panel X26
5 Control panel X25
6 Operator`s seat
8 Safety lever
9 Ventilation control
10 PA amplifier
11 Radio
12 Video camera control unit
13 XLR bush for microphone
14 Spirit level
15 Ashtray
106 LHM 550_001

Operating elements
3.3 Left master switch
3.3.1 Directions
A Preselection Function
Crane operation Lift boom
B
D
Travelling mode Reverse
Travelling mode Automatic supporting UP

C
A
B Preselection Function
Crane operation Lower boom
Travelling mode Drive forwards
Travelling mode Automatic supporting DOWN
C Preselection Function
Crane operation Swing to the right
D Preselection Function
Crane operation Swing to the left
LHM 550_001 107

Operating elements
3.3.2 Buttons
3 1
2
4
8
5
6
9
Figure 34 Left master switch
1 Preselection Function
Rotator Turn rotator counter-clockwise
Spreader Balance spreader to black flip
per
Magnet (two-hand operation) Switch off magnet
Coil tong (two-hand operation) Open coil tong
Rotator Turn rotator clockwise
108 LHM 550_001

Operating elements
Spreader Balance spreader to white flip
per
Spreader Bypass spreader
four-rope grab Grab bulk cargo
Coil tong Bypass light barrier
Cycoptronic, teach-in Change sectors
Cycoptronic, teach-in Set left destination point
- Horn
Rotator Rotator free-wheel
Crane operation, Cycoptronic Close slewing gear brake, en
able Cycoptronic
Crane operation, travelling Enable functions

mode
LHM 550_001 109

Operating elements
3.4 Right master switch
3.4.1 Directions
A Preselection Function
Crane operation Lift load
Manual cable drum Lift cable

B C
B Preselection Function
Crane operation Lower load
D A
Manual cable drum Lower cable
C Preselection Function
Spreader Open twistlocks
Spreader + Shift Extend spreader
Four-rope grab / motor grab Open grab
Travelling mode Steer right
Coil tong Open coil lugs
D Preselection Function
Spreader Close twistlocks
Spreader + Shift Retract spreader
Four-rope grab / motor grab Close grab
Travelling mode Steer left
Coil tong Close coil lugs
110 LHM 550_001

Operating elements
3.4.2 Buttons
3 1
4
2
7
8
9
Figure 35 Right master switch
Spreader Lower/raise red flipper
Spreader Lower/raise black flipper
Magnet Switch on magnet
Coil tong Close coil tong
Spreader Lower/raise white flipper
LHM 550_001 111

Operating elements
Spreader Lower/raise green flipper
Magnet (two-hand operation) Switch off magnet
Coil tong (two-hand operation) Open coil tong
SHIFT button Enable additional functions
Spreader Raise all flippers
Magnet Magnet fade out
- PA system on
Crane operation Slewing free-wheel
Cycoptronic, teach-in Set right destination point
Crane operation Close slewing gear brake
Cycoptronic Enable Cycoptronic
Crane operation, travelling Enable functions

mode
112 LHM 550_001

Operating elements
3.5 Control units

Every push button on the X25, X26, X27 and X28 control panels are fitted with
LED. This indicates the respective function.
1 Push buttons X25 and X26

1 Light Emitting Diode (LED)
` LED on:
w Function active
` LED off:
w Function inactive
1 2 3 Push buttons X27 and X28

1 Light Emitting Diode (LED) - Function 1
2 Light Emitting Diode (LED) - Function 2*
3 Light Emitting Diode (LED) - Function 3*
` LED on:
w Function active
` LED off:
w Function inactive
Key switch
1
1 Key
2 Light Emitting Diode (LED)
2
3 Button
` LED on:
3
w Function active
` LED off:
w Function inactive
NOTE
4 The functions of each button are explained in the 'Operation' section.
LHM 550_001 113

Operating elements
3.5.1 Control panel X25
0 I I 0 II 0 I 0 I
Figure 36 Control panel X25
114 LHM 550_001

Operating elements
Emergency stop
0 I
Engine Start/Stop
1
1 Ignition On/Off
` Position 0: Off
` Position I: On
2
2 Engine Start/Stop
E
I 0 II
Winch service operation mode
1
1 winch selection
` Position I: Closing winch
` Position 0: Deactivates or bypasses top-limit switch
2
` Position II: Pendant winch
2 Activation
0 I
Slack rope bypass
1
1 Slack rope bypass

` Position 0: Off
` Position I: On
2
2 Activation
LHM 550_001 115

Operating elements
Hook operation mode
Synchronise winches*
Rotator free-wheel additional mode*
Rotator operation mode*
Motor grab operation mode*
Sycratronic*
Spreader operation mode*
Retract spreader*
116 LHM 550_001

Operating elements
Extend spreader*
Four-rope grab operation mode*
Normal travel operation
Crab mode
Laying down the boom
Manual boom cable drum
Maximum engine speed*
Twinlift spreader*
LHM 550_001 117

Operating elements
3.5.2 Control panel X26
1/2
Figure 37 Control panel X26
118 LHM 550_001

Operating elements
Retract boom supports
Extend boom supports
Front/rear left support
Front/rear right support
Retract supporting cylinder
Extend supporting cylinder
Start/Stop data recorder*
LHM 550_001 119

Operating elements
Printout of last load cycle*
Printout of current load cycle*
Printout of load cycles in reverse order*
Pause data recorder*
Camera change-over*
Slewing gear working speed*
Luffing gear working speed*
Automatic supporting*
120 LHM 550_001

Operating elements
Undercarriage travelling light*
Cycoptronic*
Rotator Cycoptronic operation mode*
Cycoptronic teach-in*
LHM 550_001 121

Operating elements
3.5.3 Control panel X27 and X28
Figure 38 Control panel X27 and X28
122 LHM 550_001

Operating elements
Windscreen wiper On/Off
Windscreen wash system On/Off
Tower floodlights*
Boom floodlights*
Access lighting*
LHM 550_001 123

Operating elements
3.5.4 Fire detection and extinguishing system*
Figure 39 Tower cabin fire detection and extinguishing control unit
Figure 40 Slewing platform fire detection and extinguishing control unit
124 LHM 550_001

Operating elements
MH manual activation
SSR manual activation*
Reset
Switch-over between automatic activation deactivated and automatic activation
Key switch On / Off
Acknowledge horn
SSR manual triggering device*
LHM 550_001 125

Operating elements
3.5.5 Switch cabinet X1, X32 (switch cabinet room)
1
2
3
6
5
4
Figure 41 Switch cabinet X1
1 Light
2 Light
3 Radio remote control - key switch
4 Electric motor operating hour meter*
5 Diesel engine operating hour meter
6 Telephone connection
126 LHM 550_001

Operating elements
3.6 Litronic screen
3.6.1 Monitor overview
Figure 42 Monitor overview
1 Status indicator
2 Status display
3 Function keys
LHM 550_001 127

Operating elements
3.6.2 Start symbol
These symbols appear on the start screen as soon as the machine is switched
on. No actions are possible as long as the following symbols are displayed:
Connecting (incremented up to 3)
Connected
Receiving data
Visualising
Downloading
3.6.3 Status indicator
Displays the currently selected operation mode. The symbols appear at fol
lowing positions.
Pos.1
Overload premonition
Overload
128 LHM 550_001

Operating elements
Bypass overload
Pos.2
Normal travelling mode
Crab mode
Pos.3
Wheelset angel for crab mode (direction of arrow angel depend on wheelset
angel)
Pos.4
Support advice
Wheelset zero position
Wheelset non-synchronous
Pos.5
Battery voltage to low
Diesel engine preheat
Diesel engine ready to start
LHM 550_001 129

Operating elements
Pos.6
Diesel fuel indicator
Pos.7
Outside temperature
Hydraulicoil temperature < 10° C
Diesel engine cooling water temperature < 75°C
Pos.8
Holding winch key switch selection
Closing winch key switch selection
Winches non-synchronous
Pos.9
Holding winch slack rope
Closing winch slack rope
Holding and closing winch slack rope
130 LHM 550_001

Operating elements
Pos.10
Hoisting gear lift stop
Hoisting gear lower stop
Hoisting gear lift-lower stop
Pos.11
Luffing gear raise stop
Luffing gear lower stop
Luffing gear raise-lower stop
Pos.12
Slewing gear left stop
Slewing gear right stop
Slewing gear stop
LHM 550_001 131

Operating elements
3.6.4 Function keys
Displays the current status of the selected operation mode. Grey deposited but
tons are touch buttons. Black deposited buttons are active.
Crane operation
Travelling mode
Motorpage
Operating hour screen
General setting screen
Information screen
Modification kit screen
Error page
Acknowledge
132 LHM 550_001

Operating elements
3.6.5 Crane operation screen
Figure 43 Operation screen
LHM 550_001 133

Operating elements
3.6.6 Crane operation screen symbols

Crane operation symbols are displayed in the middle area of the screen (see
'Monitor overview').
Figure 44 Crane operation status
1 Slewing gear speed setting

2 Position slewing platform
3 Utilisation level
4 Current load chart
5 Current wind speed
6 Luffing gear speed setting
7 Current boom angle
8 Maximum permitted load on rope
9 Operation mode - Tared function
10 Clock
11 Tare
12 Tared load on rope
13 Current load on rope
14 Boom direction of movement
15 Current outreach
16 Relative hook position
17 Pactronic power
18 Pactronic
19 Tank capacitiy
20 Dieselengine rpm symbol
134 LHM 550_001

Operating elements
Winch - lift
Winch - stopped
Winch - lower
Operation speed - fast
Operation speed - middle
Operation speed - slow
Spreader twistlocks opened
Spreader twistlocks closed
LHM 550_001 135

Operating elements
3.6.7 Travel operation screen
Displays the current status of the selected travel operation mode. Grey deposi
ted buttons are touch buttons. Black deposited buttons are active.
Figure 45 Travel screen I
Figure 46 Travel screen II
136 LHM 550_001

Operating elements
3.6.8 Travel operation screen symbols

Travel operation symbols are displayed in the middle area of the screen (see
Figure 47 Travel operation status
1 Maximum permitted outreach for travelling mode

2 Support wheel advice
3 Support base advice
4 Support plate advice
5 Maximum permitted load on rope
6 Current load on rope
7 Current outreach
8 Wheel set screen inactiv
9 Travel operation screen activ
10 Minimum permitted outreach for travelling mode
11 Position slewing platform
I, II Permitted range
II Ideal range
LHM 550_001 137

Operating elements
Supporting pads down
Supporting wheels down
Supporting pads up
Supporting wheels up
The status of each selected support is shown on the corresponding symbol.
NOTE
4 Many variations of the individual symbol display is possible. One or all
eight symbols change depending on what has been selected. Status of
outriggers is dynamisch on screen shown.
138 LHM 550_001

Operating elements
3.6.9 Wheel set screen
This screen displays information relating to the individual wheel sets. The num
bering as well as the current angular deflection. Grey deposited buttons are
touch buttons. Black deposited buttons are active.
Figure 48 Wheel set screen
1 Wheelset number
2 Wheelset angel optical
3 Wheelset angel deflection
4 Wheel set screen active
5 Travel operation screen inactive
LHM 550_001 139

Operating elements
3.6.10 Information screen diesel engine

Information symbols are displayed in the middle area of the screen (see 'Moni
tor overview').
Figure 49 Information screen diesel engine
Hydraulik tank capacity
rpm
Oil pressure
Engine boost pressure
140 LHM 550_001

Operating elements
Coolant liquid additive
Battery voltage
LHM 550_001 141

Operating elements
3.6.11 Service hour meter screen

Service hour symbols are displayed in the middle area of the screen (see 'Moni
tor overview').
Figure 50 Operation hours counter screen
Diesel engine operating hours
Electro engine operating hours
Hoisting gear operating hours - Holding and closing winch
Slewing gear operating hours
Luffing gear operating hours
Travelling gear operating hours
Cable reel boom operating hours
Grab operation operating hours
142 LHM 550_001

Operating elements
3.6.12 General settings screen

Displays the selected general settings mode. Grey deposited buttons are touch
buttons. Black deposited buttons are active. Settings page are displayed in the
middle area of the screen (see 'Monitor overview').
Figure 51 Settings page screen
Test
Scoti
Language selection
Time an date
Operation mode screen
General setting screen
LHM 550_001 143

Operating elements
3.6.13 Operation mode screen

Displays the the selected operation mode. Grey deposited buttons are touch
buttons. Black deposited buttons are active. Settings page are displayed in the
middle area of the screen (see 'Monitor overview').
Figure 52 Operation screen
Relative hook position
Rope tared
Current load on rope - Hoisting and closing winch
Grabsize - Big
Grabsize - middle
Grabsize - small
144 LHM 550_001

Operating elements
Grab raise mode
Grab mode
Grab lower mode
LHM 550_001 145

Operating elements
3.6.14 Hydraulic information screen

Hydraulic information are displayed in the middle area of the screen (see 'Moni
tor overview').
Figure 53 Hydraulic information screen
Hydraulic pump
Hydraulic cylinder
Electric screen - inactive
Hydraulic screen - active
Coolant liquid additive status
Hydraulic oil temperature
146 LHM 550_001

Operating elements
Hoisting gear working pressure - Hoisting winch 1
Hoisting gear working pressure - Hoisting winch 2
Slewing gear left workig pressure
Luffing gear working pressure - up
Luffing gear working pressure - down
Slewing gear right workig pressure
Luffing gear working pressure - up
Luffing gear working pressure - down
LHM 550_001 147

Operating elements
3.6.15 Electric information screen

Electric information symbols are displayed in the middle area of the screen (see
Figure 54 Electric information screen
Electric screen - active
Hydraulic screen - inactive
Electric motor - HZ
Electric motor - V
Electric motor - A
Electric screen - active
148 LHM 550_001

4
4
Operation
4. Operation
4.1 Inspections before daily commissioning
DANGER
Non-compliance with safety regulations!
Safety risk.
4 Never start the machine when there is visible damage.
4 Report all defects and errors to the relevant supervisor and to the
Liebherr service department.
4 When there is a change of machine operator, inform the new operator of
all defects and errors that have been noted.
NOTE
4 The general safety notes in the 'Safety' section apply to the daily checks!
4 Refer to 'Maintenance' section for information on lubricants, fuels and fill
capacities.
Ensure that the following conditions are satisfied:

` All maintenance and inspection work has been regularly carried out.
` The operation manual has been read and understood.
` The operation manual is ready to hand in the cab.
LHM 550_001 149

Operation
4.1.1 Daily inspection
Before daily commissioning of the machine, perform the following visual inspec
tions:
` Leak check (hydraulic, engine and gear oil, coolant, diesel fuel)
` No damage.
` No contamination.
` Safety devices (see 'Product description, safety devices' section) present
and functional.
` Check for wear to rope and pulleys.
` Safety signs present.
` No obstacles in the working area.
` Slewing platform can turn without restriction.
` Keep a safe distance away from overhead power lines.
` Fire extinguisher present.
` Remove snow and ice.
` Unobstructed view from the cabins (clean windows, rear-view mirror
clean and correctly adjusted).
4.1.2 Daily inspection work
NOTE
4 Fill level monitoring and refilling of lubricants and fuels is described in
Chapter 5 "Maintenance".
4 All the necessary safety precautions are in the "Safety" chapter.
` Fill windscreen wash container with non flammable windscreen wash fluid
(use fluid that contains antifreeze in the winter!)
` Check engine oil level.
` Check coolant level.
` Check hydraulic oil level.
` Check distributor gearbox oil level.
` Check diesel level (monitor).
` Check diesel engine, electric motor*, fan and radiator for possible
damage.
` Empty the water separator of the fuel system.
` Check battery main switch.
` Disconnect main power supply*, auxiliary supply* (if travelling mode is
required).
` Ensure that the load chart and operation manual needed for deployment
are present in the cabins.
` Perform daily lubrication according to maintenance schedule (Chapter 5,
Maintenance, Maintenance Schedule).
150 LHM 550_001

Operation
` Check stop valve on hydraulic tank (open completely if required)
Figure 55 Hydraulic oil supply stop valve (closed position)

1 Hydraulic oil supply stop valve manual
2 Hydraulic oil supply stop valve automatic (from 2009 with fire detec
tion and fire extinguishing system, see section 'Operation/fire detec
tion and extinguishing system/hydraulic oil supply stop valve')
` Check stop valve on undercarriage fuel tank (open completely if required)
Figure 56 Stop valve on undercarriage fuel tank (open position)
LHM 550_001 151

Operation
4.2 Commissioning the machine
CAUTION
Improper procedure in start-up process of machine.
Material damage to the machine.
4 Ensure that the inspections have been carried out before commissioning.
4 Ensure that no error messages are indicated.
4 Ensure that the operation manual has been read and understood.
4 Follow all safety notes.
4 In diesel engine operation ensure that the main power supply cable has
been unplugged and wound up, and with older LHM models, even with
switch cabinet X2, power supply has been switched to generator. (With
newer LHM models power supply is switched automatically to generator).
NOTE
Start symbols
4 For further information see section Operating elements, Litronic monitor,
Start symbols.
4.2.1 Start with diesel engine

0 I
1
u Turn on ignition by turning ignition key (1) to position "I".
w Boot the software.
w Start screen appears.
LHM 550_001 152

Operation
Diesel engine preheat
w After a short time symbol changes to diesel engine ready to start.
Diesel engine ready to start
u Whilst this symbol is displayed, start diesel engine using Engine Start/Stop
button (2) near ignition.
w Diesel engine runs.
w Engine Start/Stop button flashes until machine is ready.
NOTE
4 Starting is possible exclusively while Diesel Engine Ready to Start is
indicated.
4 If this symbol goes out, switch off ignition using ignition key (turn to
position "0") then switch on again so that symbol Diesel Engine Ready to
Start appears again.
CAUTION
Non-compliance with warming precautions after starting diesel engines!
Damage to diesel engines!
4 Allow coolant temperature to increase to 75°C before crane movements
are performed!
4.2.2 Shutting down the machine
NOTE
4 Only use the emergency stop switches for emergency cut-off, never for
routinely shutting the machine down (see section Product description,
Emergency stop).
Diesel engine
NOTE
4 After machine has finished working let it run on for a few more minutes
unloaded and idling.
153 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.3 Safety lever
The safety lever serves as a safety device against uncontrolled or unwanted

operation of the machine.
u Lower the safety lever.

w Enable operation.
Figure 57 Safety lever
ASafety lever in raised position

` disables the master switch
` all crane or driving movements are stopped.
BSafety lever in lowered position

` is a condition for the operation of the crane
WARNING
If the safety lever is raised during operation, both master switches are
inactive and the crane is brought to a standstill after a few seconds!
Uncontrolled load movements!
4 Put safety lever in position B to control the machine.
WARNING
Unintentional touching of operating elements with safety lever in lowered
position B.
Uncontrolled machine movements!
4 Do not leave safe seating position.
4 Do not put objects on operating elements.
4 Raise safety lever during breaks (position A).
LHM 550_001 154

Operation
4.4 Travelling mode

The travelling mode is operated from the control station in the slewing platform
cabin, or optionally also from the tower cabin. Activation is via master switches.
DANGER
Serious personal injury and material damage, danger of tilting.
4 The maximum permissible gradient in travelling mode is 5% in the
longitudinal direction and 2% in transverse direction.
4 Drive exclusively with empty lifting device! Ensure that the load on the
rope does not fall below or exceed the minimum and maximum values
respectively quoted in the load chart for the selected radius.
4 Travelling mode with attached load is exclusively permissible after written
permission from the manufacturer(LIEBHERR)!
4 Stop travelling mode at wind speeds above the value quoted in the load
chart.
4 Check the route to be used for solid and level ground.
4 Check tyre pressure at 10 bar (not applicable for foamed tyres*).
4 Do not run over any obstacles higher than 10cm ((crane rails, etc.).
4 Consult a banksman every time travelling mode is used! (Specify hand
signals!)
4 In the absence of visual contact with instructor, stop travelling mode!
4 Take particular care in narrow passages! (drive slowly)
4 Ensure that support pads are fully retracted and thus do not touch the
ground during travelling mode.
4 Ensure that the working area (route) is adequately illuminated at twilight
and when it is dark.
4 After extended use of travelling mode (2 - 3km) check tyre temperature
with an appropriate measuring device. Avoid tyre temperatures above 70 -
80°C! To reduce the tyre temperature, support crane to relieve pressure
on tyres.
NOTE
4 Potholes and road-surface irregularities jeopardise the stability of the
crane!
NOTE
4 In both travelling mode types the travelling speed with outriggers retracted
is reduced to 30%.
155 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.4.1 Operation
The following conditions apply for normal travel operation and crab mode.
u Ensure that the outreach is in the ideal range.
u Start machine (see section 'Operation, Commissioning the machine').
u Press travelling mode function key on monitor.

w Travel screen appears on monitor.
Figure 58 Travel screen
u Position slewing platform to 0° or 180°

w Slewing platform position symbol appears green.
u Ensure that the tared load on the rope is less than the maximum permissible
load. (See section Travelling mode screen symbols)
u Ensure that the outreach is in the permissible range and in the ideal position
(See section Travelling mode screen symbols).
LHM 550_001 156

Operation
4.4.2 Normal travel operation
u Press travelling mode button on X25 control panel.

w LED in the button lights up.
w Travelling mode symbol appears in the status indicator on pos. 2 of the

monitor.
w Warning light on undercarriage lights up.
Changing between normal travel operation and crab mode:
u Move wheel sets into supported state by moving right-hand master switch
0° or 180° (straight on).
w Travelling mode symbol flashes red on pos. 4 when wheel sets not syn
chronous. (See section Operation, travelling mode, steering synchronisa
tion)
CAUTION
Non-synchronous wheel sets in travelling mode!
Severe damage to travelling gear.
4 Support machine.
4 Synchronise wheel sets.
u Retract support pads fully. (see section Operation, support)
w Monitor display changes.
CAUTION
Support pads not fully retracted!
Damage to surface, material damage to the machine.
4 Support pads at least 20cm away from ground.
157 LHM 550_001

Operation
NOTE
4 For optimal safety fully extend outriggers and support pads in parallel to
undercarriage.
4 If necessary, retract outriggers to the mechanical stop (see section
Operation, support bases) and secure support pads against turning using
the adjusting device to avoid damage to wheel sets.
4 In the event of lack of space, remove support pads, adjusting device,
mechanical stops (see Section operation, support) and fully fold in
outriggers. Keep the lower balls of the supporting cylinder at least 20cm
from the ground.
NOTE
4 only travel at 25% of the maximum travel speed when the support pads
are dismantled.
4 only fold in outriggers to the mechanical stop and do not remove support
pads.
NOTE
4 Only accelerate and brake machine slowly and gently due to its high
mass.
4 Acoustic warning signal sounds when driving the machine.
4 During travelling mode it is not possible to adjust the outriggers.
u Move left-hand master switch in direction B.

w Machine travels forwards.
B u Move left-hand master switch in direction A.
w Machine travels backwards.
u Move right-hand master switch in direction D.

w Machine steers left.
C u Move right-hand master switch in direction C.
w Machine steers right.
LHM 550_001 158

Operation
NOTE
The steering is blocked when the machine is not supported and not
travelling!
Two options to enable the steering:
4 Machine supported and travelling mode active.
4 Machine standing on the wheel sets, travelling mode active and travelling
speed greater than 0.5 km/h.
NOTE
4 Master switches jump back automatically into neutral position when
released. The steering angle nevertheless remains in the position it was
previously put in. To bring the wheel sets back to 0° or 180°, steer in the
opposite direction.
159 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.4.3 Crab mode

DANGER
Failure to comply with safety notes!
4 All conditions for travelling mode are fulfilled (see section Operation,
travelling mode, operation).
4 Particular care called for in crab mode. Greater danger of tilting!
NOTE
4 Position wheel sets at 0° or 180° to select crab mode.
u Press crab mode button on X25 control panel.

w Crab mode symbol and direction indication for wheel sets appear in the
status indicator of the monitor.
w Crab mode symbol appears on pos.2 of the monitor.
w Wheelset angel for crab symbol appears on pos.3 of the monitor. Direc
tion of arrow angel depend on wheelset angel.
w Warning light on undercarriage lights up.
The direction indication in the status indicator on the monitor changes depen
ding upon the direction of the wheel sets.
B
w The direction indication changes depending upon the orientation of the
wheel sets.
A Examples:
Direction indication left
Direction indication straight on
Direction indication right
LHM 550_001 160

Operation
DANGER
Failure to adhere to conditions for crab mode!
Danger of tilting, severe damage to travelling gear.
4 Synchronous wheel sets (See section Operation, travelling mode, normal
travel operation)
4 Retract the support pads.
4 Only accelerate and brake machine slowly and gently (particularly in crab
mode) due to its high mass.
NOTE
4 Acoustic warning signal sounds when driving the machine.
4 During travelling mode it is not possible to adjust the outriggers.

w Machine travels forwards.
B u Move left-hand master switch in direction A.
w Machine travels backwards.
u Move right-hand master switch in direction D.

w Wheel sets turn to the left.
C u Move right-hand master switch in direction C.
w Wheel sets turn to the right.
NOTE
The steering is blocked when the machine is not supported and not
travelling!
2 options to enable the steering:
4 Machine supported and travelling mode active.
4 Machine standing on the wheel sets, travelling mode active and travelling
speed greater than 0.5 km/h.
161 LHM 550_001

Operation
NOTE
4 Master switches jump back automatically into neutral position when
released. The steering angle nevertheless remains in the position it was
previously put in. To bring the wheel sets back to 0° or 180°, steer in the
opposite direction.
4.4.4 Steering synchronisation
An angle sensor that displays the current position of the wheel set in question is
installed on each wheel set.
Travelling gear synchronous symbol flashes:

` if a wheel set exhibits an excessively angular deflection more than 5° in
comparison to the others.
NOTE
4 Travelling mode not possible whilst travelling gear synchronous symbol
flashing!
u Support machine (see section Operation, support)
u Turn wheel sets to the left (D) or right (C) using right-hand master switch
C until travelling gear synchronous symbol ceases to flash.
u If it is not possible to synchronise the wheel sets contact LIEBHERR service

department.
u To check which wheel set lies outside the tolerance, switch to wheel set
D
screen.
u Press wheel set function key on the monitor.

w Wheel set screen opens.
LHM 550_001 162

Operation
Figure 59 Wheel set screen LHM 320-600
The uper value represents the current angular deflection (appears red if outside
the permitted tolerance, in which case travelling mode no longer possible)
The lower value shows the wheel set number.
163 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.4.5 Steering examples
Figure 60 Travelling mode straight on
Figure 61 Travelling mode any desired radius, 360° rotation
LHM 550_001 164

Operation
Figure 62 Travelling mode diagonal and sideways
165 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.5 Supporting the machine
DANGER
Improper supporting of machine!
Danger of tilting!
4 Outriggers are fully folded out.
4 Support pads are standing on secure and solid ground.
4 Contact surfaces of the support pads have been checked.
4 Machine is horizontally aligned (according to circular spirit level).
4 Wheel sets are relieved of load and raised from the ground.
CAUTION
Lack of attention when working with outriggers and support pads!
Severe damage to machine.
4 Retract support pads before outriggers are folded in!
4 Have outrigger movements monitored by additional personnel!
4 Always ensure that support pads are fully in contact with solid and level
ground!
4.5.1 Supporting the machine manually
Outriggers
The arrangement of the 4 buttons on the X26 control panel or the X25 control
panel (slewing platform cabin without monitor)* is identical to the arrangement
of the outriggers on the undercarriage. Front left / right and rear left / right.
u Press button of desired outrigger. (If required, all 4 buttons at the same time)
w LED in the button(s) light(s) up.
u Fold out outriggers

u Press button on X26 control panel or X25 control panel (slewing platform
cabin without monitor) until the desired position of the outriggers is attained.
w LED glows as long as button is pressed.
w The current status of the outriggers is displayed on the travel operation
screen.
LHM 550_001 166

Operation
Figure 63 Travel operation screen (outfolded outriggers)
u Fold in outriggers
u Press button on X26 control panel or X25 control panel (slewing platform
cabin without monitor) until the desired position of the outriggers is attained.
w The current status of the outriggers is displayed on the travel operation
screen.
CAUTION
Folding in outriggers with support pads fitted!
Severe material damage.
4 Remove support pads before fully retracting outriggers.
NOTE
4 The speed of travelling mode is reduced to 30% with outriggers folded in.
167 LHM 550_001

Operation
Supporting cylinder
The arrangement of the 4 buttons on the X26 control panel or the X25 control
panel (slewing platform cabin without monitor)* is identical to the arrangement
of the supporting cylinders (support pads) of the outriggers on the undercar
riage. Front left / right and rear left / right.
u Press buttons of desired 2 supporting cylinders (support pads). (If required,

all 4 buttons at the same time or otherwise in pairs)
w LED in the button(s) light(s) up.
NOTE
4 Do not select supporting cylinders (support pads) individually or in
diagonally arranged pairs.
u Retract supporting cylinder

u Press button on the X26 control panel or the X25 control panel (slewing plat
form cabin without monitor)* until the supporting cylinder is fully folded in and
wheel sets are in contact with the ground.
w The current status of the supporting cylinders (support pads) is displayed
on the travel operation screen.
u Extend supporting cylinder

u Press button on the X26 control panel or the X25 control panel (slewing plat
form cabin without monitor)* until the supporting cylinder is fully extended
and wheel sets have no contact with the ground.
w The current status of the supporting cylinders (support pads) is displayed
on the travel operation screen.
Support pads up (green)
Support pads down (green)
Wheel sets up (green)
Wheel sets down (green)
LHM 550_001 168

Operation
u Using the spirit level, adjust the support of the machine until the bubble of
the spirit level is central.
Figure 64 Tower cabin spirit level
4.5.2 Support cylinder pressure information
This symbol flashes in red on the monitor as a status indicator if at least one
supporting cylinder has too little pressure. This is purely for information.
NOTE
4 If the boom of the machine moves diagonally (via an outrigger) towards
maximum outreach, it is possible that the opposite supporting cylinder lifts
off the ground. However, there is no danger as 3-point support still exists.
169 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.5.3 Choose additional supporting base*

To select an additional supporting base, initiate the following steps:
u Fully fold out outriggers with retracted support pads..
u Fold in supporting base intermediate piece with raised lug and secure using
lug.
u Fold in outriggers to the stop (support base intermediate piece).
Figure 65 Additional supporting base intermediate piece
LHM 550_001 170

Operation
Figure 66 Additional supporting base
CAUTION
Supporting base intermediate piece not observed!
Material damage.
4 When fully folding in the outriggers, ensure that the supporting base
intermediate pieces are fully in contact with the outriggers.
171 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.5.4 Support pads
NOTE
4 fully fold out the outriggers to assemble or dismantle support pads.
4 dismantle support pads to traverse narrow passages.
4 only travel at 25% of the maximum travel speed when the support pads
are dismantled.
4 only retract outriggers to the mechanical stop anddo not dismantle
support pads.
Figure 67 Support pad
1 Support pad
2 Transport device (fork-lift truck)
3 Ramming shields*
4 Supporting cylinder
5 Adjusting device*
DANGER
Improper alignment of support pads!
4 Align support pads parallel to undercarriage (0° or 180°).
LHM 550_001 172

Operation
Figure 68 Assembly/dismantling of support pads
1 Ball joint
2 Fastening pin
3 Cotter pin
u Position support pad on the transport device using fork-lift truck.

u Lower ball joint (1) of the supporting cylinder into support pad.
u Apply fastening pin (2) and secure using cotter pin (3).
w Support pad is fitted.
NOTE
4 To dismantle the support pads, reverse the assembly procedure.
173 LHM 550_001

Operation
Adjusting device*
To secure the support pads against turning, fit and adjust adjusting device.
CAUTION
Turning of the support pads!
Damage to wheel sets.
4 Apply adjusting device on all 4 outriggers.
Figure 69 Adjusting device adjustment arrows
Figure 70 Adjusting device assembly side 1
1 Fixing pins
2 Washer
3 Cotter pin
LHM 550_001 174

Operation
Figure 71 Adjusting device assembly side 2
1 Compensator lever
2 Washer
3 Spacing pillar
4 Washer
5 Fixing pins
u Fit adjusting device in above-mentioned order and tighten with compensator

lever (1) to secure adjusting device.
NOTE
4 When correctly assembled the compensator lever always points
outwards!
175 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.6 Crane operation

Crane operation is controlled from control station in tower cabin or optionally
also from slewing platform cabin. Activation is via master switches.
NOTE
4 Crane can only be operated if machine is properly supported (see chapter
Operation, support) and an operation mode (Spreader, Grab, etc.) has
been selected.
4 Selection of operation mode is exclusively possible if master switches are
in neutral position.
4 An exception is support. Even without selection of an operating mode
supporting cylinders can be extended (if machine must be re-levelled
when starting up crane operation again).
DANGER
Very serious damage to equipment and personal injury or death.
4 Attend to failure indications on monitor.
4 Stop crane operation in the event of a failure of the load moment limiter.
4 Ensure that all outriggers are swung out, support pads are on a firm
surface, machine is horizontally aligned and all wheel sets are in the air.
(See chapter Operation, support)
4 Do not raise any load heavier than specified in the load chart (see section
Product description, load chart) for the relevant operation mode.
4 Execute crane movements smoothly and without jerking and adapt
working speed to load and outreach so that load does not swing.
4 Ensure that lifting device used has required capacity.
4 Observe the wind speed specified in the applicable load chart! Stop crane
operation if wind speed exceeds maximum permitted.
4 Ensure that all sensors, limit switches and angle sensors are working
properly.
4 Ensure that no unauthorised personnel are in working area or danger
zone of crane.
4 Ensure that the working area is adequately illuminated at twilight and
when it is dark.
4 Define hand signals (see chapter on Safety) and ensure that line of sight
between operator and banksman is clear. If a clear line of sight is not
possible, establish a radio link.
ECO operation*
All crane movements and operation modes can be fitted with economy soft
ware. Engine rpm adapts dynamically to requirements and thus consumes less
diesel fuel.
LHM 550_001 176

Operation
4.6.1 Crane movements

HOIST GEAR (raise / lower lifting device)
RIGHT-HAND master switch controls hoist gear.
B C
Direction A: raise hoisting gear
Direction B: lower hoisting gear

D A
LUFFING GEAR (raise / lower boom)
LEFT-HAND master switch controls luffing gear.
D B
Direction A: raise luffing gear
Direction B: lower luffing gear

A C
SLEWING GEAR (Slewing platform to LEFT / RIGHT)
LEFT-HAND master switch controls slewing gear.
D B
Direction D: slewing gear to LEFT
Direction C: slewing gear to RIGHT

A C
177 LHM 550_001

Operation
Slewing gear brake

Software 993390314 - 023 and later:
u See chapter Operation, Litronic to call up current software version.
If machine is at a standstill slewing gear brake engages after 12 seconds.
u In the event of a standstill, press button 9 on LEFT or RIGHT master switch.

w Slewing gear brake engages prematurely.
9
w Key press is not stored.
u Optionally, you can press button 9 on LEFT and RIGHT joystick when at a
standstill (slewing gear joystick in neutral position).
w Slewing gear brake engages immediately.
w Key press is stored.
LHM 550_001 178

Operation
4.6.2 Stop crane movements

Reaching the relevant stop conditions causes hoisting gear, luffing gear or sle
wing gear to stop automatically and movement in direction currently displayed is
no longer possible.
Hoisting gear lift-lower stop
Hoisting gear lift stop
Hoisting gear lower stop
Luffing gear raise-lower stop
Luffing gear raise stop
Luffing gear lower stop
Slewing gear stop
Example:
Entering crane via undercarriage (by opening flap) triggers slewing gear stop
and slewing gear stop icon appears on screen.
Slewing gear left stop*
Slewing gear right stop*
NOTE
4 Slewing gear left stop and slewing gear right stop are only exclusively
executed and displayed with anti-collision systems* and customer-specific
NRS land-sea page*.
179 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.7 Fuelling
DANGER
Fuel spilt during refuelling!
Burns, explosion.
4 Wipe up spillage with a clean cloth leaving no residue.
Figure 72 Filler neck
1 Lock
2 Filler neck
u Use key to open lock.
u Remove the cover.
u Check filler screen underneath for dirt, clean if necessary and replace.
u Fill tank with fuel.
u Close tank cap once more and secure with lock.
LHM 550_001 180

Operation
4.8 Air cooling
On machines that do not have a fire alarm and extinguishing system* air circu
lation is controlled manually:
` Machinery house
` Switch cabinet room
Figure 73 Machinery house cooler fan flaps
1 Fan flap with lever

2 Fan flap with slide mechanism
u Open fan flap during operation.

w Air circulation and sufficient cooling are guaranteed.
u On machines with low temperature package* fan flap will close while ma
chine warms up.
w No energy loss due to outflow of heat.
CAUTION
Ventilation system faulty!
Overheating and deformation of various components (caused by excessively
high temperature).
4 Always keep fan flap open during operation.
181 LHM 550_001

Operation
Figure 74 Switch cabinet room ventilation system.
u Open switch cabinet room ventilation system during operation.

w Air circulation and sufficient cooling are guaranteed.
u On machines with low temperature package* switch cabinet room ventilation

system will close while machine warms up.
w No energy loss due to outflow of heat.
LHM 550_001 182

Operation
4.9 Auxiliary supply*
During crane operation all power supply is via the generator. In order to main
tain lighting and heating during crane downtime, connect auxiliary supply (from
port, etc.).
NOTE
4 In order to prevent condensation in electrical systems and switch
cabinets, operate anti condensation heating (especially in winter).
4 Ensure that auxiliary supply is adapted to local conditions.
Figure 75 Auxiliary supply
1 Auxiliary supply cable drum*

2 Auxiliary supply cable drum plug*
3 Socket (230/110V)
4 Auxiliary supply socket
u Connect plug (2) to auxiliary supply socket (4).
u Connect plug for auxiliary supply cable drum (not shown) to the national
power supply provided.
NOTE
4 If no auxiliary supply cable drum is available (since optional), connect the
national power supply provided directly to the auxiliary supply plug.
183 LHM 550_001

Operation
WARNING
Improper operation of the auxiliary supply!
Personal injury and material damage due to electric shock.
4 Never reconnect plugs when live!
4 Before connecting plugs, ensure that all consumers are switched off.
4 Fold up safety snap connector on the plug and withdraw plug.
4 Seal the plug and socket with the protective covers to keep out dirt and
moisture.
4 Fully wind up the auxiliary supply cable and remove from working area.
Figure 76 Undercarriage plug*
The undercarriage plug* shown above supplies power as long as the diesel en
gine is running and the auxiliary or main power supply is plugged in.
The undercarriage plug is adapted to the respective electrical power network of

the destination.
LHM 550_001 184

Operation
4.10 Correcting rope twist
Liebherr recommends: To extend the life of ropes, twist ropes in direction of

closing:
` on initial fitting
` after renewing the ropes
` when changing lifting device attached directly to ropes.
NOTE
Before correcting rope twist:
4 perform a few alternating loads to build up tension in the ropes.
Figure 77 Correct rope twist
1 Crowbar
2 Chain
3 Rope
u Set lifting device down on ground and ensure that ropes are loose.
u Remove ropes.
u Wind chain (2) around rope (3).
u Using a crowbar (1) turn rope in closing direction using approx 100-200Nm.
u Fasten turned rope to lifting device.
u Repeat steps for all ropes.

w Rope twist is now corrected and life extended.
185 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.11 Four-rope grab*

DANGER
Serious material damage and personal injury.
4 Attend to the failure indications on the monitor.
4 Ensure that no other operation mode is active.
4 If load moment limiter fails, stop crane operation.
4 Do not raise any load heavier than specified in the load chart (see section
Product description, load chart) for the relevant operation mode.
4 Observe the wind speed specified in the applicable load chart! Stop
four-rope grab operation mode if the wind speed exceeds the maximum
permitted.
4 Use four-rope grab exclusively for its intended purpose.
4 Ensure that no unauthorised personnel are in the working area or danger
zone of the machine.
when it is dark.
4 Carry out a visual check of the four-rope grab for damage, leakage, etc.
4 Store the four-rope grab according to the applicable guidelines of the
manufacturer.
4 Obey the safety instructions and operating instructions of the four-rope
grab manufacturer!
4 To prevent slacking of rope when changing lifting device or working in
Service Winch operation mode, ensure winches are monitored by an
additional authorised person who is in telephone contact with machine
operator!
CAUTION
Use standard pulleys on boom as chain guide!
Damage to standard pulleys
4 Do not thread chains through standard pulleys on boom.
4 If necessary replace standard pulleys with special pulleys made for
chains.
CAUTION
Improper procedure when fitting the lifting device!
Damage to the ropes.
4 Before fitting ropes to the lifting device, pretension to approx. 100-200 Nm
in the direction of rotation of the rope (see section Operation, ropes).
NOTE
4 If using a four-rope grab that is not part of the scope of supply, ensure the
four-rope grab is suitable for this machine!
LHM 550_001 186

Operation
Figure 78 Four-rope grab with chain weights*

1 Closing ropes
2 pendant ropes
3 Shackle
4 Chain weights*
5 Nemag shackle
Figure 79 four-rope grab

1 Closing ropes
2 pendant ropes
3 Nemag shackle
187 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.11.1 Assembly
CAUTION
No chain weights!
Ropes do not lower by their dead weight alone.
4 Use chain weights.
CAUTION
Remove chain weights!
Ropes go up.
4 Secure ropes.
u Position already lashed lifting device (rotator, hook crossbar, etc.) approx. 15
m from crane.
CAUTION
Winch service operation mode!
All limit switches and displays of the slack rope are bypassed.
4 Use additional operators to observe the winch chamber in order to
prevent slack rope.
I 0 II
1 u In winch service operation mode select the appropriate winch (Position I or

II) and activate with the button to slacken the pendant rope and closing rope:
1 winch selection
` Position I: Closing winch
` Position II: Pendant winch
2
2 Activation
w LED lights up.
w The ropes that have been selected are displayed on the screen depen
ding on the position of the key switch:
Winch selection position II pendant winch
Winch selection position I closing winch
.
u Slacken the pendant ropes and then the closing ropes by moving the right
joystick in direction B.
B C
u Remove lashed lifting device (hook, rotator, etc.).
u Unhook boom cable from drum, unwind fully and secure to boom head or
D park in hook fixing point*. (see chapter Boom cable drum operation)
A
LHM 550_001 188
Operation
NOTE
Fitting the four-rope grab
4 Observe lay direction of rope!
Join rope with lay direction to the right exclusively to rope with lay
direction to the right and rope with lay direction to the left exclusively to
rope with lay direction to the left!
4 The ropes are colour-coded as standard.
Red - red / green - green
u Sling the four-rope grab.

u Remove the securing ropes.
4.11.2 Operation
u Select operation mode four-rope grab on control panel X25.

w Operation mode four-rope grab appears in the status display.
NOTE
4 The selected operation mode is stored in the machine control system and
automatically selected the next time the machine starts.
All four-rope grab movements are controlled with the right joystick:
` Raise - Joystick direction A

B C ` Lower - Joystick direction B
` Open - Joystick direction C
` Close - Joystick direction D
D A ` Combined movements
189 LHM 550_001

Operation
Figure 80 Combined movements
A Raise both winches 100%

B Lower both winches 100%
C Open Closing winch 100%
D Close Closing winch 100%
Pendant winch (speed Closing winch (speed

shown as %) shown as %)
1 50 100
2 33 100
3 20 100
4 50 100
5 100 100
6 100 0
Close grab
u Move right joystick in direction D until four-rope grab is closed.
B C
D A
w While it is closing, the four-rope grab closed status display on the screen
appears green.
w Four-rope grab closed.
LHM 550_001 190

Operation
w Four-rope grab closed status display on the screen appears white.
Raise / Lower
Raise means that when the four-rope grab closes the pendant winch also mo
ves in the lifting direction. This prevents the four-rope grab from being over
filled.
Lower means that when the four-rope grab closes the pendant winch also mo
ves in the lowering direction. The four-rope grab sinks further into the material.
More material can thus be picked up.
Standard setting:
Prerequisite
` The speed for Raise / Lower on the winch synchronisation page is 0%
(see Set speed for raising and lowering for automatic operation).
u During closing press button 1 (raise) on right joystick.

w Pendant winch moves in addition to closing winch at 30% of raising
speed.
u During closing press button 3 (lower) on right joystick.

w Pendant winch moves in addition to closing winch at 30% of lowering
speed.
Automatic mode:
Set speed for raising and lowering in automatic mode:
Positive value:
` Raise function is possible exclusively.
Negative value:
` Lower function is possible exclusively.
191 LHM 550_001

Operation
Figure 81 Grabe operation sheet
u Press the button to set the speed of the functions lift and/or lower.
w Speed starts at 0% and ends at +50%.
w Speed is adjusted in steps of 5%.
w When +50% is reached and the button is pressed again the value reverts
to +45% and ends at -50%. If pressed again, -45% and so on.
NOTE
4 The set value is also stored when the machine is switched off.
Automatic lifting
Prerequisite
` The speed for Raise on the winch synchronisation page is a positive per
centage (see Set speed for raising and lowering for automatic operation).
u If button 1 (raise) on right joystick is pressed during closing in automatic

mode:
w Raising is deactivated.
u If button 3 (lower) on right joystick is pressed during closing in automatic

mode:
w Lowering is possible for as long as button 3 (lower) is pressed down.
w A positive set percentage is adopted for the lowering speed.
Automatic lowering
Prerequisite
` The speed for lowering on the winch synchronisation page is a negative
percentage (see Set speed for raising and lowering for automatic opera
tion).
u If button 1 (raise) on right joystick is pressed during closing in automatic

mode:
w Raising is possible for as long as button 1 (raise) is pressed down.
w A negative set percentage is adopted for the lifting speed.
u If button 3 (lower) on right joystick is pressed during closing in automatic

mode:
w Lowering is deactivated.
LHM 550_001 192

Operation
Four-rope grab loses material
If the four-rope grab loses material after lifting, the loss can be reduced by in
creasing the closing force.
u Lift four-rope grab 1 metre above material.
u Hold button 3 on right joystick down and simultaneously run lifting until four-
rope grab is completely closed.
w Tensile force of the closing winch increases.
Open grab
u Move right joystick in direction C until four-rope grab is open.
B C
D A
w While it is opening, the four-rope grab open status display on the screen
appears green
w Four-rope grab open.
w Four-rope grab open status display on the screen appears white.
193 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.12 Motor grab*
DANGER
4 Do not raise any load heavier than specified in the load chart for the
relevant operation mode.
4 Stop motor grab operation if wind speed exceeds 20m/s.
4 Use motor grab exclusively for its intended purpose.
when it is dark.
4 Carry out a visual check of motor grab for damage, leakage, etc.
4 Ensure that all electrical connections are clean and dry.
4 Store motor grab according to applicable guidelines of manufacturer.
4 Obey safety instructions and operating instructions of motor grab
manufacturer!
operator!
CAUTION
NOTE
4 If using a motor grab that is not part of scope of supply, ensure motor
grab is suitable for this machine!
LHM 550_001 194

Operation
Figure 82 Motor grab attached
1 Rotator
2 Cable
3 Motor grab
4 lifting chain
5 Rotator hook
195 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.12.1 Assembly
NOTE
4 Attach motor grab to already slung rotator (see chapter
Operation/rotator/assembly).
u Position motor grab approx. 15m away from crane.
u Position hook of rotator above motor grab chains (4).
u Connect chains (4) to hook of rotator (5).
DANGER
Worn chains!
Load breakaway.
4 Ensure that lifting chains are in perfect condition and visually inspect for
damage before starting up.
u Switch off machine in order to connect rotator cable (2) to motor grab.
CAUTION
No zero potential on plug!
Material damage and personal injury from electric shock.
4 Switch off machine before connecting/disconnecting cable.
u Start machine and raise motor grab.

w Machine is ready for motor grab operation.
Dismantling
u Deselect motor grab operation.
u Position motor grab approx. 15m away from crane.
u Switch off machine.
CAUTION
u Loosen and remove chains.

w Motor grab is disassembled
LHM 550_001 196

Operation
4.12.2 Operation
NOTE
4 When changing between a motor grab, spreader and magnet the
following plug connections must be disconnected (on LHM 320-600 plugs
are fitted in front of control cubicle area):
` For spreader TM-4B-X2.22.S
` For motor grab TM-4B-X2.23.S
` For magnet TM-4B-X2.24.S
u Select motor grab operation mode on control panel X25.

M w LED in the button lights up.
w Motor grab operation mode and motor grab status appear in status dis
play.
NOTE
4 Rotator mode and automatic cable drum operation are automatically
selected on machines from production year 2004 onwards as soon as the
electrical connection is made between cable drum and rotator and the
machine has started up. (See section 'Operation, Boom cable drum,
Automatic mode').
All motor grab movements are controlled with the right joystick.
u Move master switch in direction A.
w Raise motor grab.
B C
u Move master switch in direction B.
w Lower motor grab.
D u Move joystick more than 50% in direction C.

A
w Open motor grab.
u Move joystick more than 50% in direction D.
w Close motor grab.
197 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.13 Rotator*
DANGER
when it is dark.
4 Carry out a visual check of rotator for damage, leakage, etc.
4 Store rotator according to applicable guidelines of manufacturer.
4 Obey safety instructions and operating instructions of rotator
manufacturer!
4 Exercise extreme caution when rotating especially long or bulky goods.
operator!
CAUTION
NOTE
4 If using a rotator that is not part of scope of supply, ensure rotator is
suitable for this machine!
LHM 550_001 198

Operation
Figure 83 Rotator for 4 ropes
1 Cable of boom cable drum

2 Rope
3 Strain relief
4 Cable plug of boom cable drum
5 Connector
6 Shackle
199 LHM 550_001

Operation
Figure 84 Rotator for 2 ropes
1 Cable of boom cable drum

2 Rope
3 Strain relief
4 Cable plug of boom cable drum
5 Connector
LHM 550_001 200

Operation
4.13.1 Assembly
u Position rotator about 15m away from crane (e.g. on a pallet).
u Connect ropes with a shackle (if 4 ropes) or without a shackle (if 2 ropes).
(See illustrations)
u Lower cable of the boom cable drum to the ground in manual mode.
u Ensure diesel engine is not running.
u Fix cable sock and strain relief.
CAUTION
u Connect cable of the boom cable drum and also attach to the rotator using a
chain.
u Start the machine.
CAUTION
Improper operation of the cable drum!
Damage to the plug of the cable drum cable.
4 In manual mode wind and unwind boom cable drum slowly exclusively.
u Tension the boom cable drum cable carefully using the joystick.
u Deselect boom cable drum manual mode.

w Machine is ready for rotator operation.
4.13.2 Operation
Rotator
u Select rotator using button on control panel X25.
w Screen display is updated according to the preselected operation mode .
You can also select free-wheeling of the rotator.
When rotator operation is selected, normal load (NL) is preset automatically.

Figure 85 HL* rotator screen display
201 LHM 550_001

Operation
u Press button 1 on the left-hand joystick.

w The rotator turns to the left (while the button is held down).

w The rotator turns to the right (while the button is held down).

w Free-wheel is activated (while the button is held down).
Rotator free-wheel additional mode

NOTE
Rotator free-wheel mode is an additional function. To select this function:
4 Select rotator free-wheel additional mode.
u Select rotator with free-wheel using the button on control panel X25.
w Screen display is updated according to the preselected operation mode
(NL hook or HL* hook).

w The rotator turns to the left (while the button is held down).

w The rotator turns to the right (while the button is held down).

w Free-wheel stops
LHM 550_001 202

Operation
4.14 Spreader*
DANGER
4 Use spreader exclusively for its intended purpose.
when it is dark.
4 Carry out a visual check of spreader for damage, leakage, etc.
4 Store spreader according to applicable guidelines of manufacturer.
4 Obey safety instructions and operating instructions of spreader
manufacturer!
operator!
WARNING
Containers offer large surface area susceptible to wind!
Personal injury and material damage.
If a container (take special care with empty containers) is hoisted from the ship
hatch, the wind can catch it and thus controlled unloading is no longer
guaranteed (see chapter Safety, dangers, danger from action of wind).
4 Observe safety notes.
4 Adjust spreader mode immediately if equilibration fails!
NOTE
4 If using a spreader that is not part of scope of supply, ensure spreader is
suitable for this machine!
203 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.14.1 Assembly
Figure 86 Spreader pins
1 Cable
2 Securing pin
3 Connecting pin
NOTE
4 Attach spreader to already slung rotator (see chapter
Operation/rotator/assembly).
u Position spreader approx. 15m away from crane.
u Position hook of rotator above spreader opening.
u Insert connecting pin (3) in opening and secure with securing pin (2).
u Switch off machine in order to connect spreader cable (1) to rotator.
CAUTION
LHM 550_001 204

Operation
WARNING
Spreader malfunction!
4 Move all personnel out of danger zone.
Figure 87 Spreader rigged to rotator
u Start machine and raise spreader.

w Machine is ready for spreader operation.
Dismantling
u Deselect spreader mode.
u Position spreader approx. 15m away from crane.
u Switch off machine.
CAUTION
u Loosen and remove all pins.

w Spreader is disassembled
205 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.14.2 Operation
NOTE
4 When changing between a motor grab, spreader and magnet the
following plug connections must be disconnected (on LHM 320-600 plugs
are fitted in front of control cubicle area):
` For spreader TM-4B-X2.22.S
` For motor grab TM-4B-X2.23.S
` For magnet TM-4B-X2.24.S
Figure 88 Spreader overview (symbols)
1 Flippers
2 Equilibration
3 Opening
4 Twistlock
u Start machine (see section 'Operation, Commissioning the machine').
u Start rotator operation mode (see chapter Operation, rotator).
u Select spreader operation mode on control panel X25:
w LED in button lights up

w Spreader operation mode appears in status display.
LHM 550_001 206

Operation
NOTE
Automatic selection
4 If machine is already running and cable from boom cable drum is already
connected to rotator, rotator operation mode is automatically selected,
4 Boom cable drum is automatically selected.
Flippers
Spreader control is designed for a spreader with four flippers (paired flippers).
Control flippers (paired flippers) with right joystick.
NOTE
4 Colour coding on buttons matches flipper colours.
Fold flippers down:
u Press button 1.
w Red flipper down
u Press button 2.
w Black flipper down
u Press button 3.
w White flipper down
u Press button 4.
w Green flipper down
Fold flippers up:
u Press button 6.
w All flippers up
NOTE
4 Normally all flippers move up together exclusively.
4 Optionally it is also possible to move flippers back up individually with the
same button.
207 LHM 550_001

Operation
Twistlocks
NOTE
4 Land spreader in order to lock twistlocks.
NOTE
4 To prevent slack rope or possible damage, “lower hoisting gear” function
is disabled as soon as spreader has landed.
Spreader - lower hoisting gear stop - bypass
Use right joystick to control "spreader - lower hoisting gear stop - bypass" func
tion.
u Press and hold button 5.

w Although spreader has landed, hoisting gear can be lowered.
Control twistlocks with right joystick.
u Move master switch in direction D.

B C w Lock twistlocks
u Move master switch in direction C.

D w Unlock twistlocks
A
u Land spreader on container.
w Spreader landed symbol appears on monitor.

w Spreader unlocked (green).
u Land spreader on container.

w Spreader locked (green).
LHM 550_001 208

Operation
u Not landed spreader on container.

w Spreader unlocked.
u Not landed spreader on container.

w Spreader locked.
NOTE
4 When twistlocks are in locked position spreader mode cannot be selected.
4 Depending on spreader equipment various procedures (e.g.spreader
landed, twistlocks locked, etc.) are shown by display lamps on spreader
(see spreader documentation).
4 "Lift hoisting gear" function is disabled if twistlocks are not fully locked.
Equilibration
Use equilibration to balance differing weight distribution in container. Control

weight distribution with left joystick.
NOTE
4 The 2 colours black and white relate to the colours of the black and white
spreader flippers.
u Press button 2.
w Equilibration moves towards black flipper.
u Press button 4.
w Equilibration moves towards white flipper.
209 LHM 550_001

Operation
Telescopingin and out
NOTE
4 Telescoping in and out is possible exclusively when no load is suspended
from spreader.
4 There are 2 possible ways of retracting and extending the spreader.
Extendspreader using button on control panel X25:
u Press button.
w Spreaderextends to next limit switch of preset position.
Retract spreader using button on control panel X25:
u Press button.
w Spreader telescopes to next limit switch of preset position.
Use right joystick to extend spreader:
u Move joystick briefly in direction C.

B C w Spreader telescopes to next limit switch of preset position.
D A
Use right joystick to retract spreader:
LHM 550_001 210

Operation
u Move joystick briefly in direction D.

B C w Spreader telescopes to next limit switch of preset position.
D A
211 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.15 Laying down the boom
During maintenance and repair work on the boom head it is possible to lay the
boom tip down on the ground,
NOTE
For machines with tower extension*:
4 Laying boom down on the ground not possible.
4 To perform maintenance or repair work on the boom head, use an
additional suitable support of the required height.
CAUTION
Improper operation!
4 Ensure that there are no persons in the area in which the boom is laid
down.
4 Ensure that the winches are monitored by additional personnel who are in
telephone contact with the machine operator and who are informed about
the dangers.
4 Ensure that the machine is not askew!
4 Ensure that the cable from the boom cable drum is unplugged from the
rotator during the laying down of the boom!
Liebherr recommends setting the slewing platform parallel to the undercarriage:

` 0
` 180
Because then the step on the undercarriage can be used. Otherwise it is still
possible to climb down through the rotary connection of the undercarriage.
u Move luffing gear (boom) with the LEFT-HAND master switch in direction B
to maximum outreach.
D B
A C
u Lower hoisting gear with the RIGHT-HAND master switch in direction B until
the lifting device reaches the ground. (Liebherr recommends laying down
B C lifting device on Euro palette or similar)
D A
LHM 550_001 212

Operation
u Press lay down boom button on X25 control panel

w Lay down boom operation mode appears on the screen.
Figure 89 Lay down boom screen
CAUTION
If the ropes become taut the lifting device (if already laid down on the ground)
will be dragged while the boom is laid down.
Material damage to the lifting device!
4 Operate (lower) hoisting and luffing gear simultaneously to prevent rope
becoming taut.
u Lower boom slowly by operating the left-hand master switch in direction B.

D B
u Lay down boom on support.
w The boom is laid down.
A C
213 LHM 550_001

Operation
Figure 90 Boom is laid down on support
Setting up the boom
u Press lay down boom button on X25 control panel

w Lay down boom operation mode appears in the status indicator on the
monitor.
u Move luffing gear (boom) slowly and carefully in direction A with the LEFT-
HAND master switch.
u Raise hoisting gear slowly and carefully in direction A with the RIGHT-HAND
master switch. (Compensate for slack rope)
NOTE
4 Slack rope is displayed on the monitor. However, no automatic stop takes
place on the winch.
u Raise boom until the lifting device is located in the working area of the ma
chine.
w Boom is set up.
LHM 550_001 214

Operation
4.16 Video monitoring
4.16.1 Monitors
Figure 91 6.8" TFT screen (on LHM supplied before 2008)
Power ON/OFF
Switches the TFT monitor on and off.
Menu
Contrast Contrast adjustment

Bright Brightness
Colour Colour saturation
Tint Colour unit
Dimmer Background illumination
Pic-Reset Resets to default values
Revolve DN/UP Horizontal image mirroring: top/bottom
(for overhead installation)
Revolve RT/LT Vertical image mirroring: right/left
(for reversing camera)
M-Video 2/1 Change signal source:
1=VIDEO INPUT
2=FOR TUNER
Select Up
Select Down
215 LHM 550_001

Operation
Figure 92 10.4" TFT screen (on LHM supplied from 2008 onwards)
1 Power On/Off *
2 Menu / Input
3 down / right / increase
4 up / left / reduce
5 Change entry mode
6 Automatic adjustment
CAUTION
Use of unsuitable cleaning equipment!
Scratches on display
4 Use soft, dry microfibre cloth exclusively.
4.16.2 Cameras
Up to 5 cameras can monitor the working area and the internal part of the ma
chine (fire risk):
` Boom head (view of lifting device)
` Reversing camera*
` Machinery house (left)*
` Machinery house (right)*
` Switch cabinet room*
LHM 550_001 216

Operation
4.16.3 control unit
Figure 93 Camera control unit
Control lever
Vertical:
` Zoom in/out
Horizontal:
` Manual focusing
NOTE
4 Control lever works exclusively for the boom head camera.
Autofocus
Video monitoring On/Off
Brighten image On/Off
camera selection
217 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.16.4 Operation
NOTE
4 Whenever there is a warning from the fire alarm and extinguishing
systems the cameras switch over automatically.
camera selection
u Camera selection position 1:

w Boom head camera active.

w Not used.

w Reversing camera* active.
Camera switchover on control panel X26
u Press camera switchover on control panel X26

w Video monitoring system switches over to fire alarm mode.
w Machine housing camera 1 active.
w Machine housing camera 2 active.
w Switch cabinet room camera* active.
LHM 550_001 218

Operation
4.17 Litronic testing system
The Litronic test system is a comprehensive diagnosis and service tool availa
ble on the Litronic monitor, service notebook and also via a modem connection.
It is used to monitor I/O, flags, internal system variables and statuses.
The test system can also be used totally independently across a number of dif
ferent interfaces (e.g.: Litronic monitor, service notebook, modem* etc.)
4.17.1 Features
The Litronic test system provides the following functions:

` Displays the installed software ID and version numbers.
` Displays all module I/O with comments.
` Displays the internal memory variables with comments.
` Displays a selection list.
` Displays correction values (machine parameters)
` Displays messages (message stack)
` displays special functions:
S Modem configuration*
S Memory card control (CF)
S CAN configuration/status
4.17.2 General
The Litronic test system comprises a number of "pages"; the function keys are
used to move from page to page.
Some pages have two menu bars that you can toggle between using the func
tion symbol MENU 1/2 . The first menu bar is always active when a page first
opens.
The home page (main menu) is displayed when the Litronic test system is first
started. On each subsequent start, the page that was being used when the sys
tem was exited will be loaded. The other settings are also retained.
CAUTION
Wrong setting or correction value!
Material damage.
4 Authorised LIEBHERR Service personnel exclusively are entitled to
change the values of the Litronic test system.
219 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.17.3 Start
u Press the Testing system button on the Litronic service panel. (at any time,
including during operation)
w The Litronic test system main menu is displayed on the screen.
NOTE
4 Machines supplied from 2009 onwards have the Litronic service desk in
the form of a touchscreen field on the screen and this can be faded in and
out (see Control units/screen).
3
4
Figure 94 Litronic test system home page
1 Header: Name of the current screen

2 Main window: Actual information
3 Input: For display and correction of entered values, display of
status messages and input prompts.
4 Menu bar: Function symbol assignments
The first 2 lines in the main window (project ID and project ID index) show the
current software status.
NOTE
Multiple execution of the function symbols
4 Some commands such as: PREVIOUS and NEXT can be executed many
times in sequence.
NOTE
4 Operating error messages are not displayed while the Litronic test system
is running!
LHM 550_001 220

Operation
4.17.4 Home screen
Various other pages are accessed from the main menu. It is also possible to
terminate the Litronic test system and return to the mode screen by pressing
function key BACK.
The following pages are accessible from every main page:

` INPUT/OUTPUT
` MEMORY
` SELECT
` MESSAGES
` CORRECTION
` SPECIAL
4.17.5 INPUT/OUTPUT page
This page allows all the module I/O to be viewed.
Description of the function symbols:

` NEXT CAN LINE goes to the next CAN line
` PREVIOUS MODULE and NEXT MODULE toggle between the modules
in the selected CAN line.
` PREVIOUS and NEXT move the cursor up and down to highlight a
channel in the selected module. The highlighted channel is displayed as
an inverse I or O.
` Add the highlighted channel to the Select list using SELECT. If it is al
ready selected, it will be removed from the list. The name of a channel
will be displayed inverse if it is selected.
` MENU 1/2 toggles between the 2 menu bars.
` DOCUMENT displays 16 channels (inputs/outputs) with comments on a
page. In digital modules (32 channels) use PREVIOUS and NEXT to
switch to the second page.
` UNDOCUM displays all inputs and outputs on one page.
` IDENTIFY displays 16 inputs/outputs on one page with the identifier on
one page. In digital modules (32 channels) use PREVIOUS and NEXT to
switch to the second page.
` BACK returns to the main menu.
4.17.6 MEMORY page
This page is used to display the internal flags that are being used.

` NEXT SECTION moves between the 16 flag sections: X-B-W-D, 1-2-3-4.
` PREVIOUS PAGE and NEXT PAGE toggle between the pages. Each
page contains 16 flags from the selected section.
` PREVIOUS and NEXT move between the flags. The highlighted flag ap
pears as an inverse M.
221 LHM 550_001

Operation
` Use SELECT to add the highlighted flag to the Select list. If it is already
selected, it will be removed from the list. The name of a flag will appear
inverse if it is selected.
` DOCUMENT displays flags with additional comments.
` IDENTIFY displays flags with their identifiers.
4.17.7 SELECT page
To avoid having to always switch between the I/O and the flag menus, values
can be added to the Select list. These entries can then be viewed and edited on
the SELECT page at the same time. The Select list can consist of several
pages.
If a new value is added to the Select list when the list is already full, the oldest
value is removed from the list.
These Select lists can also be backed up on the memory card and reloaded
again when necessary.
Select list entry

` Using the function symbol SELECT directly on the INPUT/OUTPUT,
MEMORY or CORRECTION page.
` Using the function symbol ADD on the SELECT page by inputting the
IEC address.
` Reading from a file with the LOAD FROM CARD function key on the
SELECT page.
Delete select list entry

` Using the function symbol SELECT directly on the INPUT/OUTPUT,
MEMORY or CORRECTION page, call up a selected value.
` Delete the highlighted entry using the function symbol DELETE on the
SELECT page.

` ADD adds a new entry to the SELECT page. A menu bar is displayed
which is used to enter the IEC address. (see ADD SELECTION page)
` DELETE removes the selected entry from the list.
` PREVIOUS and NEXT move between the separate select entries. The
highlighted entry is displayed as an inverse I, O or M.
` NEXT PAGE moves to the next page of the Select list so that more va
lues can be viewed.
` IDENTIFY displays the inputs/outputs or tags with the identifier.
` DOCUMENT displays the inputs/outputs or tags with the comments.
` LOAD FROM CARD loads a new SELECT list from a file. A menu is then
displayed. The menu contains a list of file names, one of which can be
selected, and also allows a specific file name to be entered. (see
SELECT FILE LOAD page)
LHM 550_001 222

Operation
` SAVE TO CARD saves the current SELECT list in a file. A menu appears
from which the name of the file can be selected. (see SELECT FILE
SAVE page)
ADD SELECTION page
This page is accessed using the ADD function symbol from the SELECT page.
The IEC address is entered in the input line using the corresponding function
symbols and the numeric keys on the Litronic service panel.
Example:
S Desired IEC address: %QW1.17.1
S %, Q and W are entered using the corresponding function symbols.
S 1.17.1 is entered as normal numbers and can be edited as necessary
using function symbol TAKE & BACK to accept the address.

` Use M, I or Q to select the IEC type flag, input or output. These change
each time a key is pressed and appear in the input bar. A correction can
be made by pressing another type.
` X, B, W, D are used to select the size of the IEC entry. These change
each time a key is pressed and appear in the input bar. A correction is
made by pressing another size.
` TAKE & BACK calls up the SELECT page again and takes the IEC
address from the input line.
SELECT FILE LOAD page
Enables a saved Select list to be loaded from the memory card.

` CHARACTER NEXT adds a new character to the end of the input line.
New characters can also be added by entering numbers and letters.
` CHARACTER DOWN and CHARACTER UP modify the last character in
the input line.
` PREVIOUS and NEXT move the cursor up and down in the list. When a
file is selected, its name is copied to the input bar. this is the easiest way
to select the desired file.
` LOAD loads the file displayed in the input line and then returns to the
SELECT page.
` BACK abandons the operation and returns to the Select page.
SELECT FILE SAVE page
Saves a Select list to the memory card.

` CHARACTER NEXT adds a new character to the end of the input line.
New characters can also be added by entering numbers and letters.
223 LHM 550_001

Operation
` CHARACTER DOWN and CHARACTER UP modify the last character in

the input line.
` PREVIOUS and NEXT move the cursor up and down in the list. When a
file is selected, its name is copied to the input bar.
` SAVE saves the Select list in a file (enter file name in the input line) and
returns to the Select page.
` BACK abandons the operation and returns to the Select page.
CORRECTION page
This page is used to display the correction values. It is very similar to the
MEMORY page, but only displays correction values.

` NEXT SECTION moves between the 4 correction value sections:
X-B-W-D
` PREVIOUS PAGE and NEXT PAGE toggle between the pages. Each
page contains 16 correction values from the selected section.
` PREVIOUS and NEXT move between the correction values. The high
lighted correction value is displayed as an inverse M.
` DOCUMENT displays the correction values with comments.
` IDENTIFY displays the correction values with the identifier.
` BASE MIN & MAX displays the correction values with the default value
and the upper and lower limits.
` SAVE TO CARD saves the current correction values in a file. The file
name can be selected from the menu that now appears. A standard file
name (created from the current date) is suggested. This name can, of
course, be changed (see SELECT FILE SAVE page).
` Use SELECT to add the highlighted entry to the Select list. If it is already
selected, it will be removed from the list. The name of a correction value
will be displayed inverse if it is selected.
MESSAGES page
This page displays the saved application messages (e.g. sensor errors) and all
system errors (CAN bus, module, CPU, etc.). These are buffered internally.

` all lists all stored messages (max. 15.000).
` PREVIOUS START and NEXT START move between all messages sa
ved at each start-up.
` PRIORITY MAXFILTER and PRIORITY MINFILTER list the saved mes
sages filtered by priority.
` GROUP FILTER lists the saved messages filtered by certain groups.
` SINCE START lists exclusively the messages since the machine was
started.
` LANGUAGE enables a different language to be loaded for the messages.
Messages that are not found in the selected language are displayed in
LHM 550_001 224

Operation
English. This language change applies only to the MESSAGES page and
not to the Litronic test system (see LANGUAGE SELECTION page).
` PREVIOUS and NEXT move between the messages.
` SAVE TO CARD saves all the messages (ALL or SINCE START) in a
file. The file name can be selected from the menu that now appears. A
standard file name (created from the current date) is suggested. This
name can, of course, be changed (see SELECTION FILE SAVE page).
LANGUAGE SELECTION page
The language in which the messages are displayed is selected on this page.

` PREVIOUS and NEXT move between the separate language files.
` SELECT is used to select and load the highlighted language.
225 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.17.8 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS page
You can access various other pages from this page, or return to the home page
by pressing BACK.
The following pages can be accessed from the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS

page.
` MODEM
` DISPLAY INFO
` DRIVE
` SYSTEM LANGUAGE
` TIME
` SAMPLE
` LEVEL
` SYSTEM STATUS
` DAN CONFIG
` MDE/PDE
` CAN LINE INFO
` CLIENTS
MODEM FUNCTIONS page*
This page is used to configure and control the modem*.
The current modem status (Online, Offline, False PIN etc.) may be viewed in
the input bar.

` DIAL dials a previously entered phone number.
` HANGUP terminates an active modem connection (hang up handset).
` RLP ON / OFF switches the radio link protocol for GSM modem connec
tions on or off. These settings become active the next time the machine
is switched on.
` V32/V110 switches on the v32 or v110 protocol for GSM modem connec
tions. This setting is not active until the next time the machine is switched
on.
` PREVIOUS and NEXT change between the interfaces; the default Mo
dem Client is COM2.
` PIN INPUT allows the PIN code for GSM modems to be entered manu
ally.
` MODEM CONNECT enables the modem server program to be started on
an unused interface.
` BACK returns to the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS page.
LHM 550_001 226

Operation
DRIVE FUNCTIONS page
This page displays information about the current drive.

` REMOVE CARD must be performed before removing a memory card
from the drive. Switching off the Litronic control system is another option.
The system automatically recognises when a new card has been in
serted.
` DIR LIST displays the files and directories (but no sub-directories) on the
current drive.
` PREVIOUS DRIVE and NEXT DRIVE change between the individual
drives available to the Litronic controller.
` CHECK CARD checks the current drive for errors
TIME FUNCTIONS page
Date and time are displayed on this page.

` DAYLIGHT SAVING toggles daylight saving time on and off.
` TIMEZONE MOVE WEST moves the time zone settings an hour to the
west.
PRIOITY LEVEL page (for LIEBHERR service per

sonnel only)
Enter the Litronic code, which provides access to the Supervisor Level, on this
page.

` When the LEVEL CHANGE key is pressed, the value in the input line is
examined to see whether it is a valid Litronic code.
CAN CONFIGURATION page
All the CAN modules that are inserted, together with their usage status, are dis
played on this page

` NEXT PAGE moves to the next page.
227 LHM 550_001

Operation
CAN LINE INFORMATION page
This page displays the CAN lines being used and their settings.

` MODULE INFO changes to the CAN CONFIGURATION page.
DISPLAY CONFIGURATION page
The display options for the INPUT/OUTPUT page are defined on this page.

` ALL MODULES is used to display all CAN modules (USED and NOT
USED) on the INPUT/OUTPUT page.
` ONLY USED MODULES: only modules that are currently set to USED
are displayed on the INPUT/OUTPUT page.
` NUMBER STYLE switches the inputs, outputs and flags between stan
dard and hexadecimal display.
` UPDATE INTERVAL changes the update rate of the input, output and
flag displays.
SYSTEM LANGUAGE SELECTION page
This function allows the system language to be changed by selecting a

language file or loading the internal standard language. The selected system
language is only activated once the Litronic control system is switched back on.

` PREVIOUS and NEXT move between the separate language files.
` SELECT loads the marked language files as the new system language
and returns to the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS page.
` USE DEFAULT loads English as the new system language and returns to
the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS page.
` BACK abandons the operation and returns to the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
page.
LHM 550_001 228

Operation
SAMPLING TRACE page
The SAMPLING TRACE is used for online data recording of previously defined
inputs/outputs.
The page displays SAMPLING TRACE information and allows its status to be
modified, and also allows the recorded data to be saved.

` SAMPLE ACTIVE activates the SAMPLING TRACE functionality once
the options have been defined. It is used to record the data and check
the trigger conditions.
` TRIGGER MANUAL simulates the trigger conditions. This function key is
only available if SAMPLING TRACE is active and the trigger conditions
are not yet satisfied.
` END MANUAL ends SAMPLING TRACE recording and returns automati
cally to the READY status. This function key symbol is only available if
SAMPLING TRACE is active.
` LOAD FROM CARD loads a configuration from a saved SAMPLING
TRACE file. A menu is then displayed from which you can select a file
name (see SELECT FILE LOAD page).
` SAVE TO CARD saves the recorded data and the SAMPLING TRACE
configuration in a file. A menu is then displayed from which you can
select a file name (see SELECT FILE SAVE page).
` SAVE TO SELECT takes variables that were used in the SAMPLING
TRACE and saves them in the SELECT list. Existing entries in the
SELECT list are deleted.
` LOAD FROM SELECT loads the currently selected variables into the
SAMPLING list.
` PREVIOUS and NEXT move between configuration data. The highlighted
(active) entry is displayed inverse.
` CHANGE is used to change the highlighted entry to the value in the input
bar. This only happens, however, if the value is within the permitted
limits.
229 LHM 550_001

Operation
SYSTEM STATUS page
This page shows the current system status (running, stopped, etc.) and the
timing of the PLC (programmable logic controller) task.

` SYSTEM TASKS displays information about the SYSTEM TASKS.
` BOARD INFO displays board information (voltage, temperature, etc.).
MDE/PDE page
This page shows the status of the MDE (Machine Data Acquisition), the PDE
(Process Data Acquisition) and the data logger.

` MDE displays the MDE data.
` PDE displays the PDE data.
` SELECT GRAPHIC lists the saved graphics (e.g. company logo) for prin
ting the PDE data. The desired graphic can be selected.
` LOGGER displays the data from the data recorder.
` SAVE TO CARD saves the MDE, PDE or data recorder data in a file. The
file name can be selected from the menu that now appears. A standard
file name (created from the current date) is suggested. This name can, of
course, be changed (see SELECT FILE SAVE page).
CLIENTS page
This page shows the status of the individual communication interfaces (clients).

` PREVIOUS and NEXT move between the interfaces
LHM 550_001 230

Operation
4.18 Operator`s seat
CAUTION
Incorrect adjustment of driver's seat!
Posture damage and injuries.
4 Only adjust driver's seat with machine stationary
4 Adjust driver's seat to the best of your knowledge and belief
Figure 95 Driver's seat overview
1 Arm rest
2 Safety belt*
3 Seat height adjustment
4 Inclination of seat
5 Damper setting
6 Inclination of backrest
7 Horizontal adjustments
8 Safety belt clasp*
9 Backrest
10 Headrest
231 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.18.1 Adjusting the driver's seat
Figure 96 Adjusting the driver's seat horizontally
u Adjust driver's seat horizontally using lever 6
Figure 97 Seat height and backrest inclination of driver's seat
u Adjust inclination of back rest using lever 7

u Adjust seat height using lever 3
LHM 550_001 232

Operation
Figure 98 Adjust inclination of seat and arm rests
u Adjust inclination of seat using lever 4

u Adjust arm rest using screw 1 (each arm rest is adjusted individually)
Figure 99 Damper setting
u Adjust driver's weight by turning the adjustment wheel 5 on the driver's seat
233 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.19 Windscreen wiper
Every LHM is fitted with windscreen wipers in the tower cabin and the swivel
platform cabin (see chapter Product description, technical description, slewing
platform cabin or tower cabin).
The following buttons are installed for each windscreen wiper on the relevant
control panel:
1 2 3
u Press "windscreen wiper on/off" button
w LED 1 - Intermittent windscreen wiper is on - (wiper wipes at defined in
tervals).
w LED 2 and 3 - windscreen wiper is on
u Press "Windscreen wiper on/off" button.

w The button LED goes out.
w Windscreen wiper is off.
u Press and hold down "Windscreen wash system on/off" button

w Windscreen wash system is on.
u Release "Windshield wash system on/off" button.

w The button LED goes out.
w Windscreen wash system is off.
CAUTION
Dirty windscreens!
Poor view. Personal injury and damage to property.
4 Ensure that sufficient screen wash solution is present (see chapter
product description, technical description, turntable cabin or tower cabin,
screen wash solution filler neck
LHM 550_001 234

Operation
4.20 Telephone system

CAUTION
Damage!
Improper use of the telephone system adversely affects the service life of the
telephone system components.
4 Avoid exposure to high temperatures and sunlight.
4 Keep rain and water spray well away from telephone system components.
CAUTION
Improper operation of the telephone system and the telephone system
components!
Damage to the telephone system and the telephone system components.
4 Avoid exposure to high temperatures and sunlight.
4 Keep rain and water spray well away from telephone system components.
4.20.1 Telephone sockets
Figure 100 Telephone socket
1 Lock
2 Cover
u Unfasten lock (1) and remove cover (2)
u Insert telephone system plug.

w Telephone system is ready.
Telephone sockets are installed in:

` Switch cabinet room
` Machinery house
` undercarriage switch cabinet X5
` Tower cabin
` Slewing platform cabin
` Winches
` Tower
` undercarriage access
` Boom
` Slewing platform middle section
235 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.20.2 Handset operation
The handset is located in the black box on the front undercarriage access.
u After use, secure handset in box (on bracket) again.
Figure 101 Telephone system handset
1 Loudspeaker
2 Call button
3 Speak button
4 Microphone
5 Top screw for battery changing
6 Bottom screw for battery changing
7 Connector plug
u Insert connector plug (7) of the handset into desired telephone socket.
u Press call button 2.

w Signal sounds on handset, headset control or headset itself.
u To speak, press speak button 3.
LHM 550_001 236

Operation
4.20.3 Headset and control operation
Figure 102 Headset and control for telephone system
1 Loudspeaker
2 Microphone
3 Lever
4 Call position
5 Off position
6 Talk position
7 Connector plug
8 Socket
9 Screws for battery changing
10 Plug
237 LHM 550_001

Operation
u Insert plug (10) in socket (8) of control unit.
u Insert connector plug (7) of control unit into desired telephone socket.
u Set lever (3) of control unit to call position (4).

w Signal sounds on handset, headset control or headset itself.
u Set lever (3) of control unit to talk position (6).

w Headset is ready for conversation.
u Set the lever (3) of control unit to off position (5) if telephone system is not in
active use.
w Headset is ready for reception.
4.20.4 Change batteries
u Loosen and remove identified screws (items 5 and 6 on handset, item 9 on

headset control unit).
u Open the cover.
u Change batteries (observe polarity).
u Close cover and screw firmly.

w Batteries are changed.
Disposal
Avoid the risk of environmental damage.
regulations.
LHM 550_001 238

Operation
4.21 PA amplifier
CAUTION
Improper operation of the amplifier!
Damage.
4 Keep foreign bodies and liquids away from the amplifier.
4 Protect amplifier against direct sunlight. Overheating danger! Allow to cool
off before use.
4 Switch off immediately in the event of smoke or stench!
4 Do not overload the amplifier for long periods. Thermal overload!
4 Clean front of amplifier exclusively with a dry and clean cloth. Do not use
cleaning agents or chemicals.
4.21.1 Overview
Figure 103 Overview of PA amplifier
1 XLR microphone input

2 DIN microphone input
3 Volume control for microphone input
4 Volume control for additional inputs
5 Sound control
6 ATT switch
7 Mono switch
8 AUX input
9 ON / OFF switch
XLR microphone input
This input allows the use of dynamic microphones with balanced and unbalan
ced output. If this input is used at the same time as the DIN input, both signals
are transmitted
239 LHM 550_001

Operation
DIN microphone input

This input allows the use of dynamic microphones with balanced and unbalan
ced output. If this input is used at the same time as the XLR input, both signals
are transmitted Special connections to the plug allow music to be turned down
manually (see ATT switch). LED lights up when microphone is plugged in.
Volume control for microphone inputs
The volume of both microphone inputs (XLR and DIN) is controlled by the vo
lume control.
Volume control for additional inputs
The volume of the AUX input is controlled by the volume control for the additio
nal inputs.
Sound control
The high and low frequencies are controlled by the sound control. The middle
position is neutral.
ATT switch
The AUX input is turned down by the operation of the ATT switch. This function
is used to give priority to microphone announcements that would otherwise be
mixed with AUX signals.
Mono switch
Switching from STEREO to MONO for AUX input.
AUX input
The AUX input allows the connection of car radio, CD player, MP3 player, etc.
4.21.2 Operation
u Volume control to minimum (turn right round to the left).
u ON / OFF switch to ON and ensure that LED lights up.

7
u Operate button 7 PA system ON on the right-hand master switch.
NOTE
4 To prevent background noise and feedback, speak close to microphone.
LHM 550_001 240

Operation
4.22 Undercarriage bell
DANGER
Third parties entering the danger zone.
Serious injuries, death!
4 Do not loiter under a suspended load.
4 Pay attention to crane movements.
4 Before accessing the machine or the danger zone, make contact with the
operator.
Figure 104 Bell on undercarriage
u Ring undercarriage bell

w Access to undercarriage appears on screen.
241 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.23 Emergency exit
CAUTION
Leaving the machine improperly through carelessness and failure to use the
descent device correctly!
Severe injury to one or more persons.
CAUTION
Emission of smoke!
Poisoning or suffocation.
4 Use fire escape hood. See also additional documentation, Fire escape
hood.
WARNING
Use the maintenance door on the slewing platform as an emergency exit!
Danger of accident and falling!
4 Use slewing platform emergency exit (through undercarriage) exclusively.
NOTE
4 Use the ladder in the slewing platform as a maintenance ladder
exclusively and not as an auxiliary exit!
LHM 550_001 242

Operation
4.23.1 Slewing platform emergency exit
CAUTION
Failure to leave the machine correctly!
Danger of accident and falling.
4 Use the emergency exit exclusively in an emergency and when the
machine is at a complete standstill.
4 Use the steps and handrails provided to climb into and out of the machine
under normal circumstances. (See Chapter Operation, climbing into and
out of the machine)
4 Never jump from the machine!
Figure 105 Slewing platform emergency exit
243 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.23.2 Emergency exit from the tower cabin
CAUTION
Failure to use the rescue equipment correctly!
Danger of accident and falling.
4 Use rescue equipment exclusively after thorough training.
4 Have the equipment tested by a specialist after every use or at least once
a year. Ask for a test report (e.g. document, stamp, badge etc.).
1 Rescue equipment
2 Emergency descent eyelet
u Take the rescue equipment (1) out of its storage in the tower cabin.
u Fasten the rope to the emergency descent eyelet (2) with the karabiner (on
the rope).
u Throw down the rope
1 Cover
2 Storage compartment
3 Rescue harness, rope, karabiner
u Stand over the rescue harness with legs apart.
u Grasp the safety harness by the D-rings
u Lift the safety harness until it is below the shoulders.
u Latch the D-rings into the karabiner (of the safety harness).
LHM 550_001 244

Operation
u Slip the "braces" up.
u Step over the tower cabin platform rails, suspended in the safety harness.
u Hold the rope that is running through the rescue equipment firmly in the left
hand.
u Operate the brake lever with the right hand.
u Release the brake cautiously!
NOTE
4 To stop or apply the brake, hold the running rope tightly and / or release
the brake lever.
245 LHM 550_001

Operation
4.24 Decommissioning
WARNING
Unauthorised use of machine!
Severe physical injury and material damage.
4 When leaving the machine, protect against unauthorised use, damage by
vandalism and any possible adverse environmental impact.
When shutting down the machine, a distinction is made between:

` Short work interruption: Waiting time or breaks
` Long work interruption: Overnight or several days

` The machine is on ground that has a suitable load-bearing capacity.
` The machine does not impede any public safety facilities for persons or
animals.
` The place where the machine is left is adequately secured.
` Ensure that a power supply is provided for the safety equipment (e.g.
helicopter light*, etc.).
4.24.1 Short work interruption
The machine operator remains on site.
u Set down and secure the load.
u Switch off diesel engine before leaving the tower or slewing platform cabin
and lock up tower or slewing platform cabin.
4.24.2 Long work interruption
The machine operator leaves the site.
u Set down and secure the load.
u Remove the ignition key and keep it in a safe place.
u Lock doors.
S Tower and slewing platform cabin
S Slewing platform entrance
S Service doors
S Undercarriage flaps
S Switch cabinet room doors
S Machinery house doors
S Tower doors
LHM 550_001 246

Operation
4.25 Emergency stop
The emergency stop buttons allow the machine to be shut down quickly in a
dangerous situation.
As soon as an emergency stop key is pressed:

` diesel engine shuts down,
` multi-disc brakes are applied thereby abruptly braking the engine.
WARNING
Press emergency stop button!
Swinging load, damage to property and personal injury.
4 No personnel in danger zone!
4 Use emergency stop button exclusively for emergency cut-off and not as
a normal procedure for shutting down the engine.
NOTE
4 After restoring operational safety, disengage emergency stop button by
turning anticlockwise in order to restart engine.
4 Check operation of multi disc brakes and look for wear after every
emergency stop.
4 Visually inspect steel structure, ropes and pulleys for damage.
Emergency stop control panel
Emergency stop
247 LHM 550_001

5
5
Maintenance
5. Maintenance
Make sure that the persons carrying out the maintenance on the machine:
` have read and understood this entire operating manual
` have received instruction on the machine
` have received training on this machine at the Liebherr training centre
` use only original Liebherr spare parts
NOTE
4 Liebherr will regard as null and void any obligations entered into by
Liebherr and/or its dealers such as warranties, service agreements etc.
without prior notice where spare parts which are not original Liebherr
parts or have not been purchased from Liebherr are used for maintenance
and repairs.
All the maintenance activities and intervals specified in the maintenance plan
must be adhered to without fail. The engine documentation supplied with the
machine contains a description of the maintenance activities to be carried out
on the diesel engine.
Proper functioning of the machine requires conscientious care and mainte

nance. The hydraulic system may be considered maintenance-free if the filters
are checked and changed appropriately.
The maintenance intervals given in the maintenance schedule are actual ma
chine operating hours.
If these intervals are longer than half-yearly as a result of low machine

usage, all parts that require lubrication and all external exposed parts must be
lubricated at least half-yearly to protect them against the influence of the
weather.
Whenever the machine is not going to be used for at least 3 months, all
exposed parts must be protected against the influence of the weather. This
protection must be removed before recommissioning the machine.
CAUTION
Incorrect maintenance or failure to observe the maintenance and inspection
intervals may cause damage or premature wear to the machine.
To avoid damage to the machine:
4 Observe the prescribed maintenance and inspection intervals. Shorten
the intervals if necessary.
WARNING
If incorrect procedures are followed, the machine may be damaged and
serious injuries may be caused to personnel!
4 Turn off the machine when carrying out maintenance work.
4 Deactivate the fire detection and extinguishing system.
4 Secure the machine against unauthorised start-up.
LHM 550_001 248

Maintenance
5.1 Maintenance schedule
Maintenance operations are divided into two groups identified as follows:
z Symbols with colour fill:

` The machine operator or its maintenance personnel carry out the
maintenance tasks under its own responsibility.
` Maintenance personnel:
Trained personnel with the appropriate qualifications, specialist know
ledge and experience needed to carry out maintenance tasks.
Z Symbols without colour fill:

` Authorised and qualified personnel of LIEBHERR or its authorised
dealers carry out these maintenance and inspection tasks.
` Authorised and qualified personnel:
Specially trained personnel with comprehensive and in-depth knowledge
of components and systems who have been authorised by LIEBHERR to
carry out this work.
These are primarily Liebherr service engineers who have been trained by
the manufacturer itself or one of its service agents.
Special intervals are intervals for maintenance to be carried out at the time indi
cated.
NOTE
4 The spare parts catalogue lists all spare parts need for carrying out
maintenance and inspection work.
CAUTION
Failure to observe the maintenance intervals will cause premature wear
or damage to the machine.
To avoid premature wear or damage to the machine:
4 Carry out maintenance at the interval that expires first (e.g.: if "2000
operating hours" or "annually" is stipulated, whichever is reached first
applies)
NOTE
Notes regarding maintenance intervals:
4 To determine maintenance intervals, use the mechanical operating hours
counter on the switch cabinet (see chapter: Control elements, Control
units, Switch cabinet)
4 If necessary, carry out the maintenance and inspection tasks before the
specified intervals.
4 Clean or change contaminated filters before the specified intervals.
249 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
Maintenance/inspection according
WORK TO BE CARRIED OUT
to operating hours
6000h / every 3 years

by trained maintenance personnel by authorised maintenance
1000h / half-yearly
personnel
500h / 3-monthly
one-off task one-off task
Special intervals
2000h / yearly
40h / weekly
repetition interval repetition interval

8h / daily
z when necessary Z when necessary

L yearly, at the start of the cold season
Overall machine
Visual check of crane
Check threaded connections and weld seams for rust (see technical In
formation, welding edge inspection survey)
Inspect weld seams of luffing cylinder
for the first time at 15000h, thereafter at 20000h, thereafter every 2000h
or yearly (see technical Information, welding edge inspection survey)
Check anti-corrosion coating (see Chapter, Maintenance, Anti-corrosion
protection)
Check anti-corrosion paint (see Chapter, Maintenance, Anti-corrosion
protection)
Diesel engine, MAN D2842 LE
Check the engine externally for oil, fuel and coolant leaks
Check the oil level of the diesel engine
Change the engine oil
Change the engine oil filter
Change the engine oil separator
Check all connecting elements in the switch cabinet for tight fit and tigh
ten if necessary
Retighten cylinder head bolts (1st tightness)
after the first 20-50h (with overhauled engine)
Retighten cylinder head bolts (2nd tightness) (with overhauled engine)
Check ribbed V-belts, replace if necessary
Check V-belt tightener pulley, replace if necessary
Check and if necessary adjust the valve clearance
Check compression pressure
7500h
Check starter motor and replace wear parts if necessary
7500h
Check exhaust gas turbocharger for contamination, clearance, operation,
3500h replace if necessary
Fuel system, MAN D2842 LE
Check the water separator on the fuel prefilter, drain off condensate
Check fuel tank, drain off condensate
Replace fuel prefilter
Replace fuel filter
LHM 550_001 250

Maintenance
to operating hours

1000h / half-yearly
personnel
500h / 3-monthly
Special intervals
2000h / yearly
40h / weekly

8h / daily

Check the injection nozzles, replace if necessary

7500h
Check the oil and fuel lines for leaks
Cooling system, MAN D2842 LE
Check coolant level, correct if necessary
Check the anti-corrosion coating concentration and frost protection
Replace coolant
z Check the water cooler fins for contamination
Change the cap of the compensation tank
Check the cooling system for leaks
Remove and reinstall the coolant pump, repair if necessary
7500h
Air filter, MAN D2842 LE
Empty the dust extraction valve of the air filter
Check the air filter
z Renew the air filter elements
Check the air filter underpressure display
Check the intake and exhaust system for condition and leaks
Electric motor
Lubricate ball bearings (50Hz)
7600h
Lubricate ball bearings (60Hz)
Hydraulic system
Check the oil level of the hydraulic system
Perform hydraulic oil analysis, 10h after every oil change (reference point
measurement)
Perform hydraulic oil analysis at 500h
Perform hydraulic oil analysis at 1,000h / 1 year
Change hydraulic oil at 2,000h / 2 years for NON-Liebherr hydraulic oils
Change hydraulic oil at 4,000h / 4 years for Liebherr Hydraulik 37
Change hydraulic oil at 6,000h / 6 years for Liebherr Hydraulik Plus or
Liebherr Hydraulik Plus Arctic
z Clean the hydraulic tank on oil change
Replace the return filter
Replace all oil filters
Replace the pressure accumulator
251 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
to operating hours

1000h / half-yearly
personnel
500h / 3-monthly
Special intervals
2000h / yearly
40h / weekly

8h / daily

Drain water from hydraulic tank

Check for leaks
Clean and lubricate the piston rods of all hydraulic cylinders
Replace the breather filter
LHM 550_001 252

Maintenance
to operating hours

1000h / half-yearly
personnel
500h / 3-monthly
Special intervals
2000h / yearly
40h / weekly

8h / daily

Distributor gearbox
Check oil level of distribution gearbox
Change gear oil
Check that the fan is working and replace if necessary
Slewing gear
Check the oil level of the slewing gearbox
Change gear oil
Grease the toothing
Lubricate the stud bolts
Check the bearing lubrication (grease collar)
Check the screw pretensioning, torque of the roller slew bearing / under
5000h carriage - slewing platform.
Check the screw pretensioning, torque of the slewing platform connec
5000h tion, front and rear sections.
Check the screw pretensioning, torque of the tower - slewing platform
5000h connection.
Hoisting gear
Check the oil level of the hoisting gearbox
Change gear oil
Check the drive sleeve of the hoisting gear motors
Check the oil level of the holding brakes
Change the oil of the holding brake
Travelling gear
Check the oil level of the travel gear
Change gear oil
Check levelling, adjust if necessary
Lubricating wheel set axles and links
Manually replace the grease of the drive units
Check the tightening torque of the wheel nuts
Check tyre pressures
253 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
to operating hours

1000h / half-yearly
personnel
500h / 3-monthly
Special intervals
2000h / yearly
40h / weekly

8h / daily

Electrical system
Check the back-up batteries of the load magnet device before use by
means of a battery test
Check batteries and cable connections
Grease battery poles, check terminals are tight
Check battery fluid and top up if necessary (using distilled water only)
Replace filter mat of the switch cabinet
Replace the generator air filter mat
Clean the undercarriage slipring transmitter
Boom
Change the gear oil of the cable drum on the boom
10000
h
Check the screw pretensioning, torque of the boom connection.
5000h
Lifting device + rotator
Spreader: Measure and adjust the gap of the brake on the tower motor
Spreader: Measure and adjust the gap of the brake on the telescopic mo
tor
Rotator: Change the hydraulic oil and filter, clean the slipring transmitter
(see additional devices, rotator)
Visually check the Nemag shackle for cracks
Check the Nemag shackle for cracks by MPI (magnetic powder inspec
tion)
For machines in grab operation (four-rope grab, motor grab or magnet
operation), check the Nemag shackle by MPI (magnetic powder inspec
tion).
Visually inspect for damage on all components between the rope and lift
100h ing device (e.g. chains, shackles, etc.)
Central lubrication
Check the grease content of the lubricant pumps
Check all lubrication points (grease collar)
Check all lubrication points of the central lubrication system
Ropes and pulleys
Check ropes
Lubricate ropes
Check whether ropes are due for replacement
LHM 550_001 254

Maintenance
to operating hours

1000h / half-yearly
personnel
500h / 3-monthly
Special intervals
2000h / yearly
40h / weekly

8h / daily

Check pulleys for damage

Safety
Check safety devices (slewing gear, luffing gear, hoisting gear)
Check emergency stop;
operate emergency stop with ignition on and diesel engine at rest
Check hoisting limit switch and undercarriage flap (centre ladder) to en
sure they are working correctly
Check acoustic warning devices
Check LMB switch-off threshold
Fire detection and extinguishing system
Visually inspect the whole system for damage and dirt
Check the whole system to ensure it is working correctly
Renew extinguishing generators every 5 years
Test hydraulic oil supply stop valve
255 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.2 Lubrication and oiling
NOTE
Cross-references
4 Refer to maintenance schedule for lubrication and maintenance intervals.
(See chapter: Maintenance, Maintenance schedule)
4 Filling capacities are given in the chapter: Maintenance, Filling capacities.
4 The lubricants to be used are indicated in the chapter: Maintenance,
Lubricants.
Points and components to be greased:

` Central lubrication systems (boom, tower, slewing platform, undercar
riage)
` Ropes
` Open gear
` Electric motor*
` Lifting device
` Wheel sets
Points and components to be oiled:

` Cable drum
` Diesel engine
` Distributor gearbox
` Driven wheel sets
` Hydraulic oil tank
` Slewing gearbox
` Winch(es)
` Lifting device (rotator, hook, etc.)
NOTE
Lifting device
4 For the lubricant and filling capacity, refer to the manufacturer's
documentation.
LHM 550_001 256

Maintenance
5.3 Filling capacities
NOTE
Filling capacities
4 The filling capacities shown here are approximate values.
4 The actual filling capacities should only be determined with the oil dipstick
and/or the sight glass.
Make sure that:

` the lubricants concerned are suited to the local climatic conditions.
` if the machine is provided with optional fuels and lubricants (-30°C), this
information has priority.
Unit / item (general) No. (lubricant table) Filling capacity

Diesel engine (MAN) No. 1 35l
Slewing gear No. 2 17,2l each
Distributor gearbox No. 2 16l
Wheel set (driven) No. 2 8.5l each
Boom cable drum See documentation for cable drum See documentation for cable drum
Cable drum main power supply No. 3 See documentation for cable drum
Hydraulic tank No. 4 See chapter: Product description, Technical
data, Hydraulic tank
Fuel tank Diesel fuel with sulphur content <= 0.5% See chapter: Product description, Technical
data, Fuel tank
Cooling system No. 8 144l (MAN)
Windscreen wash system No. 9 5l / cabin
Central lubrication system No. 5 -
Grease nipple (for greasing with grease gun) No. 5 -
Roller-bearing swing ring (toothing) No. 5 -
Ropes No. 6 See chapter: Maintenance, Ropes and pul
leys
Sealing rubber on doors and covers Silicone spray -
Hinges, connectors, closures Ordinary oil -
Winche(es) type (LHM 550) No. 2 (lubricant table) Filling capacity (in litres)
HL---NL104S2 Transmission 80
Bearing 3,6
257 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.4 Lubrication chart
No. Lubrication points Outside Type ISO Specification Liebherr

temperature VG/SAE Lubricants
1. Engine, oil bath air filter year-round to -20°C SAE 10W-40 ACEA E4 Liebherr Motoroil 10W-40
below -20°C with pre API CF
heating
year-round to -20°C SAE 10W-40 ACEA E4/E6/E7 Liebherr Motoroil 10W-40 low ash
below -20°C with pre API CF-4 / CG-4 required when using a soot particle
heating CH-4 / CI-4 filter
year-round to -30°C SAE 5W-30 ACEA E4 Liebherr Motoroil 5W-30

below -30°C with pre API CF
heating
2. Mechan. gears and to -20°C SAE 85W-90 API GL5 Liebherr Hypoid EP90
winches
3. Drive shafts to -40°C SAE 75W-90 API GL4; GL5, MT1 Liebherr Syntogear Plus 75W-90
4. Hydrostatic drive unit, from -25°C to 50°C** ISO VG32-46 DIN 51 524 / T3 Liebherr Hydraulic 37
hydraulic steering SAE 10W-20 HVLP
ATF* 1.DEXRON II D/E
from -25°C to 50°C** ISO VG46 (32-68) DIN 51 524 / T3 Liebherr Hydraulic Plus
SAE 10W-20 HVLPD HC
biodegradable in ac
cordance with CEC-
L-33A393
from -50°C to 30°C ISO VG15-46 DIN 51 524 / T3 Liebherr Hydraulic Plus Arctic
SAE 0W-20 HVLPD HC
biodegradable in ac
cordance with CEC-
L-33A393
5. Roller bearing, friction from -25°C to 150°C Lubricating DIN 51 502 Liebherr universal grease 9900
bearing, ball/roller-bear For lubrication system grease, lithium KP 2 K-30
ing swing rings, cardan from -20°C to 150°C saponified

KPF 2 N-25
pivots, other grease lub
from -60°C to 140°C DIN 51 502 Liebherr universal grease Arctic
rication
For lubrication system KPFHC 1N-60
from -55°C to 140°C
LHM 550_001 258

Maintenance
No. Lubrication points Outside Type ISO Specification Liebherr

temperature VG/SAE Lubricants
6. Open gear wheels and from -25°C to 150°C Lubrication and DIN 51 502 Liebherr universal grease 9900
crown gears, ropes For lubrication system preservation OGPF 2
from -60°C to 140°C OGPF 1 Liebherr universal grease Arctic
For lubrication system
all areas OGPF 00 Liebherr paste spray
7. Telescopic boom all areas Special regulation DIN 51 502 Liebherr grease for telescopic
KP 2 K-30 components 9613 Plus
8. Coolant to -37°C DIN 51,757/4 Liebherr Antifreeze Mix
DIN 51 432/2
9. Screenwash fluid to -80°C Rala Klirr
* If Liebherr oil is not being used, ATF oil is compulsory for disc brakes.
** When the oil preheater is activated, the outside temperature can be about
10°C lower.
The specifications indicated in the lubricant table represent a qualitative mini
mum standard for the oils.
Liebherr products have been developed and tested with one another. There is
no guarantee that third-party oils** will correspond to the quality and per
formance of original Liebherr oils.
**Oils from other manufacturers.
NOTE
Authorisation to use third-party oils:
4 Contact the Liebherr Lubricant Hotline (+49 (0) 7354/80-6060 or
lubricants@liebherr.com).
5.4.1 Ordering information
Engine oil
5l canister 20l canister 210l drum 1000l container

Liebherr Motoroil 10W-40 10 29 05 06 10 33 02 39 10 33 02 46 10 28 62 79
Liebherr Motoroil 10W-40 low ash 10 32 61 13 10 32 61 12 10 32 61 11 10 32 61 10
Liebherr Motoroil 5W-30 10 42 57 12 10 42 57 13 10 42 57 15 10 42 57 19
259 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
Gear oil

Liebherr Hypoid 90 EP 10 66 48 74 10 66 48 75 10 66 48 76 10 44 16 36
Liebherr Syntogear Plus 75 W-90 10 33 02 85 10 33 02 87 10 33 02 88 10 29 64 77
Hydraulic oil

Liebherr Hydraulic 37 10 66 48 65 10 66 48 67 10 66 47 12 10 66 48 56
Liebherr Hydraulic Plus 10 29 64 80 10 33 02 72 10 33 02 76 10 29 64 81
Liebherr Hydraulic Plus Arctic 10 29 64 79 10 33 02 77 10 33 02 78 10 29 64 78
Grease
400g cartridge 5kg tub 10kg tub 25kg tub

Liebherr universal grease 9900 10 29 68 16 10 29 68 13 10 29 68 12
Liebherr universal grease Arctic 10 29 68 28 10 29 68 25 10 29 68 24
Liebherr paste spray 10 33 03 08 (950g) 10 33 03 11
Liebherr grease for telescopic com 86 13 036 08

ponents 9613 Plus
Coolant

Liebherr Antifreeze Concentrate 10 30 12 15 10 42 84 10 10 42 84 11
Liebherr Antifreeze Mix 10 65 18 38 10 30 12 13 10 45 54 46 10 35 90 77
Screenwash fluid

Screenwash -80°C 89 03 108 14
Oil concentrate

Liebherr special additive NL 10 51 53 00 10 51 57 52
Oil analysis kit
Oil analysis kit: 88 56 018 14
LHM 550_001 260

Maintenance
5.5 Diesel engine
5.5.1 Checking the oil level
CAUTION
Hot surfaces and hot engine oil.
Burns and open wounds.
4 Only inspect the diesel engine when it is at rest.
4 Wear protective clothing.

` The engine has been switched off and secured against unauthorised
starting.
` The machine is level.
` After turning off the diesel engine wait 20 minutes.
` Wear protective clothing.
Figure 106 Diesel engine oil level

1 Engine oil filler neck
2 Oil dipstick
u Take out the oil dipstick (2) and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth.
CAUTION
If dirt and foreign bodies get into the distributor gearbox:
The distributor gearbox is liable to be damaged.
4 Make sure the distributor gearbox is free of dirt and foreign bodies.
u Put the oil dipstick back in as far as it will go and wait a short time.
u Take the oil dipstick out again and hold it horizontally.
w The oil level is between the MIN and MAX markings.
w No further action needed.
w Oil is below the MIN marking - Top up oil according to lubricant table.
261 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
CAUTION
Insufficient oil pressure
is liable to cause irreparable damage to the diesel engine.
4 If the oil pressure does not build up after 10 seconds, turn off the diesel
engine.
4 Check the cover of the oil filler neck.
4 Check the oil level.
4 Check the diesel engine for damage.
DANGER
Leaking engine oil
poses a risk of fire.
4 Clean the diesel engine thoroughly.
NOTE
Oil filter
4 The oil filters must be changed every time the engine oil is changed.
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 550_001 262

Maintenance
5.5.2 Topping up the engine oil

starting.
Figure 107 Diesel engine oil level

1 Engine oil filler neck
2 Oil dipstick
u Remove the cover of the engine oil filler neck.
u Top up with suitable engine oil according to the lubricant table via the engine
oil filler neck.
CAUTION
Overfilling of engine oil
is liable to cause irreparable damage to the diesel engine.
4 Make sure that the engine oil level is between the MIN and MAX
markings.
CAUTION
u Check the oil level after 5 minutes (see chapter: Maintenance, Diesel en
gine, Checking the oil level).
NOTE
Oil filter
Disposal
regulations.
263 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.5.3 Draining the engine oil

starting.
` Have a sufficiently large collecting container and a suitable oil drain hose
to hand.
Figure 108 Draining the engine oil
1 Oil filter tightening screw

2 Oil filter
3 Oil drain screw
4 Oil sump drain
u Place a suitable collecting container (oil-resistant, free of leaks, sufficient

capacity) under the diesel engine.
u Remove the protective cap from the oil sump drain (4).
u Connect a suitable oil drain hose to the oil sump drain.
u Drain the engine oil into the collecting container which you have placed
ready.
u Unscrew the oil drain screw from the oil filter (3) and drain the engine oil into
a suitable collecting container.
u Fit new sealing rings on the oil drain screws of the oil filter and screw them
back in.
u Remove the oil drain hose.
u Fit new sealing rings on the oil sump drain.
u Reattach the protective cap on the oil drain.
LHM 550_001 264

Maintenance
CAUTION
DANGER
Leaking engine oil
NOTE
Oil filter
Disposal
regulations.
265 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.5.4 Changing the oil filter
NOTE
Oil filter

starting.
` Have a sufficiently large collecting container and a suitable oil drain hose
to hand.
` An original Liebherr oil filter is available.
Figure 109 Draining the engine oil
1 Oil filter tightening screw

2 Oil filter
3 Oil drain screw
4 Oil sump drain
CAUTION

capacity) under the oil filter.
u Open the oil drain screw (3).
u Drain oil into the collecting container via the two oil drain screws (3).
LHM 550_001 266

Maintenance
u Undo the oil filter tightening screws (1).

u Remove the oil filters.
u Take out the oil filter elements and replace them with new original Liebherr
oil filters.
u Clean all parts thoroughly with cleaning fluid.
CAUTION
u Reattach the oil filters with new seals and tighten with the oil filter tightening
screws.
NOTE
Seals
4 Make sure that the seals fit snugly.
4 While tightening the oil filter tightening screws, hold the oil filters firmly to
prevent the seals from twisting.
u Screw in and tighten the oil drain screws.

u Check the oil level (see chapter: Maintenance, Diesel engine, Checking the
oil level) and top up if necessary (see chapter: Maintenance, Diesel engine,
Topping up the engine oil).
DANGER
Leaking engine oil
Disposal
regulations.
267 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.5.5 Changing the oil separator

starting.
` Original Liebherr oil separators are to hand.
Figure 110 Oil separator
1 Hose clamp
2 Oil separator
3 Hose clamp
u Place a cloth under the oil separator in case any oil escapes.
u Undo the hose clamp (1) and carefully pull the hose off the oil separator.
u Open the hose clamp (3) with pliers and carefully pull the hose off the oil
separator.
u Now perform the same actions in reverse, fitting a new original Liebherr oil
separator.
u Make sure you have a tight fit.
CAUTION
DANGER
Leaking engine oil
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 550_001 268

Maintenance
5.6 Fuel system
CAUTION
Direct contact with fuel or with condensate/diesel mixture.
Chemical burns, eye injuries.
CAUTION
DANGER
Escaping diesel fuel
4 Diesel engine and parts which come into contact with diesel fuel must be
cleaned thoroughly.
NOTE
4 Work on the components of the common rail system must only be carried
out by specially trained maintenance personnel.
269 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.6.1 Draining condensate in the fuel prefilter

starting.
` A suitable and sufficiently large (acid-resistant) collecting container is
available.
Figure 111 Water separator on fuel prefilter
1 Vent screw
2 Sight glass
3 Ball valve
4 Drain hose
u Check the fuel via the sight glass (2) on the water separator.
u The liquid in the sight glass has a uniform colour.

w The fuel does not contain a significant proportion of condensates. No
further action needed.
u Two different coloured liquids are visible in the sight glass.

w Drain off the condensate/diesel mixture as follows:
u Position a suitable and sufficiently large (acid-resistant) collecting container

under the drain hose (4).
u Open the vent screw (1).
u Turn the ball valve (3) anticlockwise.
u Leave the ball valve open until only pure fuel comes out.
u Close the ball valve and vent screw.
LHM 550_001 270

Maintenance
Disposal
regulations.
5.6.2 Draining condensate in the fuel filter

starting.
available.
Figure 112 Fuel filter
1 Drain plug

under the drain hose (1).
u Open the drain plug.
u Leave the drain plug open until only pure fuel comes out.
u Close the drain plug.
Disposal
regulations.
271 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.6.3 Draining condensate in the fuel tank

starting.
available.
Figure 113 Fuel tanks
1 Day tank drain plug (tower)

2 Fuel tank drain plug (undercarriage)

under the drain hose (1) or (2).
u Leave the drain plug open until only pure fuel comes out.
u Close the drain plug.
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 550_001 272

Maintenance
5.6.4 Cleaning the fuel prefilter

starting.
` An original Liebherr strainer and a new seal are available.
Figure 114 Prefilter
1 Prefilter cover
u Undo the screws and remove the cover of the filter housing.
u Remove the seal.
u Remove the strainer.
u Rinse the strainer and filter housing with clean diesel fuel.
u Blow out the strainer and filter housing with compressed air.
u Insert the strainer in the filter housing.
u Fit a new seal.
u Screw on the cover of the filter housing to a torque of 10 - 12Nm.
u Open the vent screw (see chapter: Maintenance, Fuel system, Draining con
densate from fuel prefilter).
273 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
Figure 115 Hand pump
1 Plunger
2 Hand pump
u Unscrew the plunger (1) of the hand pump (2) 1-2 times and pump until bub
ble-free fuel comes out.
u While pumping, tighten the vent screw on the prefilter.
u Screw the plunger of the hand pump in again and tighten.
u Start the engine and check the fuel prefilter for leaks.
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 550_001 274

Maintenance
5.6.5 Changing the fuel filter
DANGER
Damaged filter housings and filter elements (deformed, dented, damaged
sealing rings)
pose an extreme risk of fire!
4 Use only new, undamaged original Liebherr filter housings and filter
elements.
4 On no account reuse filter elements once they have been removed!
starting.
` An original Liebherr filter element and a new seal are available.
Figure 116 Changing the fuel filter
1 Filter elements
2 Filter housing
u Loosen the filter housing and unscrew it together with the filter element.
u Remove the filter element from the filter housing.
u Rinse the filter housing with clean diesel fuel.
u Fit a new seal.
u Insert a new original Liebherr filter element in the filter housing and tighten to
25Nm.
u Bleeding the fuel system (see chapter: Maintenance, Fuel system, Bleeding
the fuel system).
Disposal
regulations.
275 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.6.6 Bleeding the fuel system

Bleed the fuel system when:
` The fuel tank has run out of fuel.
` Fuel filters have been changed.
` Operating the engine for the first time.
starting.
` The ignition must be turned on.
available.
Figure 117 Fuel filter

1 Vent screws
under the fuel filter.
u The vent screw (1) of the first fuel filter in the flow sequence should be
opened a little (1-2 turns).
Figure 118 Hand pump

1 Plunger
2 Hand pump
LHM 550_001 276

Maintenance
u Unscrew the plunger (1) of the hand pump (2) 1-2 times and pump until bub
ble-free fuel comes out.
u Retighten the vent screw and torque to 25 Nm.
u Repeat the processing for the second fuel filter in the flow sequence.
u Screw the plunger of the hand pump in again and tighten.
u Start the engine and check the fuel prefilter for leaks.
Disposal
regulations.
277 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.7 Air filter

CAUTION
Hot surfaces!
4 Only inspect the air filter when the machine is at rest.
5.7.1 Checking air filter and intake system

starting.
u Clean the air filter in accordance with the maintenance schedule.
u In case of dust-intensive use, regularly check and clean the dust extraction
valve.
u If the air filter is damaged or does not work properly (leaks), replace it with
an original Liebherr air filter.
u Check air hoses for cracks and other damage.
u Check hose clamps for tight fit and tighten if necessary.
Figure 119 Location of air filter

1 Air filter
2 Diesel engine
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 550_001 278

Maintenance
5.7.2 Emptying the dust extraction valve

starting.
Figure 120 Dust extraction valve air filter
1 Dust extraction valve
u Squeeze the rubber lip on the dust extraction valve (1) several times.
w Dust comes out.
Disposal
regulations.
279 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.7.3 Emptying the dust reservoir

starting.
Figure 121 Air filter
1 Dust reservoir
2 Tensioning bracket
3 Filter element
4 Securing element
5 Filter holder
u Open the tensioning bracket (2).
u Remove and empty the dust reservoir (1).
u Replace the dust reservoir, ensuring that it is straight and the dust extraction
valve points downwards.
u Close the tensioning bracket without exerting a great deal of force.
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 550_001 280

Maintenance
5.7.4 Changing the filter element

starting.
` Two original Liebherr filter elements including securing elements are
available.
Figure 122 Air filter

1 Dust reservoir
2 Tensioning bracket
3 Filter element
4 Securing element
5 Filter holder
u Open the tensioning bracket (2).
u Remove, empty and clean the dust reservoir (1).
u Pull out and dispose of the filter element (3).
u Unscrew the securing element (4) from the filter holder (5) and dispose of it.
u Screw a new securing element into the filter holder (lightly moisten the secu
ring element with oil).
u Insert the filter element in the filter holder and check for tight fit.
u Replace the dust reservoir, ensuring that it is straight and the dust extraction
valve points downwards.
u Close the tensioning bracket without exerting a great deal of force.
Disposal
regulations.
281 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.8 Cooling system
CAUTION
Hot parts of the cooler and hot coolant.
4 Only inspect the cooling system when it is at rest.
Figure 123 Water and charge air cooler
1 Water and charge air cooler

2 Water cooler compensation tank
LHM 550_001 282

Maintenance
5.8.1 Checking the coolant level

starting.
` The cooling circuit has cooled down.
Figure 124 Water cooler compensation tank
1 Compensation tank
2 Compensation tank cap
3 Coolant level sight glass
u Check the coolant level with the sight glass (3).

w If coolant is clearly visible in half the sight glass, no further action is
required.
w If the coolant level is more than halfway down the sight glass, top up with
suitable coolant according to lubricant table (see chapter: Maintenance,
Cooling system, Topping up coolant).
283 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.8.2 Checking the coolant
u Ensure that the coolant contains between 50% and 60% anti-corrosive
agent/anti-freeze.
w Anti-freeze effective down to -37°C.
CAUTION
Too high a proportion of anti-corrosive agent/anti-freeze.
Damage to engine.
4 Never use more than 60% anti-corrosive agent/anti-freeze.

starting.
` A strip kit or a suitable testing instrument is available.
` Coolant and anti-corrosive agent/anti-freeze are available.
CAUTION
Hot parts of the cooler and hot, spurting coolant.
u Unscrew the compensation tank cap (2) by turning its anticlockwise (safety
lock - the cap engages in the intermediate position).
u Wait until the cooling system is depressurised.
u Gently press the compensation tank cap downwards and unscrew it comple
tely.
u Take a sample of coolant and check the concentration of anti-corrosive

agent/anti-freeze with the strip kit or testing instrument.
w If the concentration of anti-corrosive agent/anti-freeze is between 50%
and 60%, no further action is required.
w If the concentration of anti-corrosive agent/anti-freeze produces any
other result, drain and change the coolant.
u Replace the compensation tank cap and close it tightly.
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 550_001 284

Maintenance
5.8.3 Top up coolant
CAUTION
Unsuitable coolant.
Destruction of cooling system.
4 Use only suitable coolant according to the lubricant table.

starting.
Figure 125 Water cooler compensation tank

2 Compensation tank cap
3 Coolant level sight glass
CAUTION
tely.
285 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
u Slowly (no more than 10l per minute) top up with suitable coolant according
to the lubricant table.
w Coolant is visible halfway up sight glass.
CAUTION
Dirt and foreign bodies in the cooling system!
Damage to cooling system.
4 Make sure that no dirt or foreign bodies get into the water cooler
compensation tank when topping up.
u Replace the filler neck cap and close it tightly.
u Switch on the engine.
u After 5 minutes check the coolant level via the sight glass on the compensa
tion tank.
w If the coolant is halfway up the sight glass, no further action is required.
w If the coolant is less than halfway up the sight glass, top up the coolant.
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 550_001 286

Maintenance
5.8.4 Draining coolant
CAUTION
Unsuitable coolant.
Destruction of cooling system.
4 Use only suitable coolant according to the lubricant table.

starting.
` Have a sufficiently large collecting container and a suitable drain hose
available.
Figure 126 Cooling water drain
1 Coolant hose
2 Coolant drain
CAUTION
u Open the filler neck cap of the compensation tank (see chapter: Mainte
nance, Cooling system, Topping up coolant).
CAUTION
Dirt and foreign bodies in the cooling system!
Damage to cooling system.
4 Make sure that no dirt or foreign bodies get into the water cooler
compensation tank when topping up.
287 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
u Place a suitable and sufficiently large collecting container underneath the

coolant drain (2).
u Slowly and carefully unscrew the cap of the coolant drain (2) by turning its
anticlockwise (safety lock - the cap engages in the intermediate position).
u Gently press the cap of the coolant drain and carefully unscrew it comple
tely.
u Pay attention to the seals of the cap.
u Connect the drain hose from the Liebherr tool kit to the coolant drain (as
soon as it is connected, coolant flows out).
u Drain the coolant into a suitable collecting container which you previously
placed in position.
u Remove the drain hose
NOTE
Coolant cap:
4 Only replace the coolant cap once you have refilled the cooling system.
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 550_001 288

Maintenance
5.8.5 Changing the cap of the compensation tank
u See maintenance schedule concerning maintenance intervals.

starting.
` An original Liebherr compensation tank cap is available.
Figure 127 Compensation tank cap

2 Water cooler compensation tank cap
CAUTION
tely.
u Remove the compensation tank cap and replace it with a new original Lieb
herr cap.
u Place the compensation tank cap accurately in the recess, then fix and close
it
5.8.6 Cleaning the water and charge air cooler
u Keep the cooling fins of the water and charge air cooler clean so as to gua
rantee adequate cooling.

starting.
u For detailed cleaning instructions, refer to the chapter: Maintenance,

Cleaning.
289 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.9 Electric motor

CAUTION
Wrong grease.
Damage to electric motor.
4 Only use lubricants in accordance with the lubricant information label
affixed to the electric motor.
CAUTION
Beware of hot surfaces and live and rotating parts.
These can cause burns, electric shock and injury.
4 Only inspect the electric motor when it is at rest.
Figure 128 Electric motor
1 Electric motor
2 Grease nipple
starting.
u Lubricate ball bearings in accordance with the maintenance schedule.

u Place the grease gun on the grease nipple and inject suitable grease ac
cording to the lubricant information label on the electric motor.
w Old grease escapes.
u Keep the electric motor clean.
u Regularly check the fastenings (screws), connections and seals.
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 550_001 290

Maintenance
5.10 Distributor gearbox
CAUTION
Hot gearbox components and hot gearbox oil or hydraulic oil.
4 Exclusively carry out maintenance and inspections with the machine at
rest.
Figure 129 Distributor gearbox
1 Breather filter
2 Oil dipstick
3 Oil drain
4 Drive for pump
5 Driven by engine
291 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.10.1 Checking the oil level

starting.
u Take out the oil dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth.
CAUTION

Disposal
regulations.
LHM 550_001 292

Maintenance
5.10.2 Topping up the gear oil

starting.
u Remove the breather filter from the distributor gearbox.
CAUTION
u Top up with suitable gear oil according to the lubricant table via the breather
filter opening.
u After 5 minutes check the oil level with the dipstick.
u Take the dipstick out and hold it horizontally.

u Reattach the breather filter to the distributor gearbox.
Disposal
regulations.
293 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.10.3 Draining the gear oil

starting.
` The gear oil is at normal operating temperature.
available.
Disposal
regulations.

capacity) under the distributor gearbox.
u Remove the breather filter.
CAUTION
u Remove the protective cap from the oil drain.
u Connect a suitable drain hose to the oil drain.
u Drain the gear oil via the drain hose into a suitable collecting container.
u Reattach the protective cap on the oil drain.
u Reattach the breather filter.
LHM 550_001 294

Maintenance
5.11 Slewing gear
Figure 130 Slewing gear
1 Oil dipstick / ventilation

2 Oil filler neck
3 Oil drain
4 Toothed pinion
295 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.11.1 Check the slewing gear oil level

starting.
` The machine is horizontal both lengthwise and crosswise.
` The slewing gearbox is at normal operating temperature.
u Clean the area around the oil dipstick (1).
CAUTION
Dirt and foreign bodies in the gearbox!
Damage to gearbox.
4 Make sure the gearbox is free of dirt and foreign bodies.

w Oil is below the MIN marking - top up with suitable oil according to lubri
cant table and instructions (see chapter: Maintenance, Slewing gear, Top
ping up slewing gear oil).
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 550_001 296

Maintenance
5.11.2 Topping up slewing gear oil

starting.
` Have a suitable funnel available.
u Clean the area around the oil dipstick and oil filler neck.
w The oil dipstick opening also serves as a vent.
u Open the oil filler neck (2).
u Top up with suitable oil according to the lubricant table using a suitable
funnel.
CAUTION
Damage to gearbox.
u Reinsert the oil dipstick as far as it will go.

u Insert the oil dipstick.
u Close the oil filler neck.
u Turn the machine on and operate the slewing gear in both directions.
u Turn off the machine, after 5 minutes check the oil level of the slewing gear
and top up if necessary.
Disposal
regulations.
297 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.11.3 Draining the slewing gear oil

starting.
` A suitable and sufficiently large collecting container is to hand.
` An oil drain hose is to hand.
w The oil dipstick opening also serves as a vent.
CAUTION
Damage to gearbox.
u Place the collecting container in position.
u Remove the protective cap from the oil drain (3) and connect the oil drain
hose.
w Oil drains out.
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 550_001 298

Maintenance
5.11.4 Grease the toothing

starting.
` Suitable grease according to the lubricant table is available.
u Lubricate the open gear of the roller slew bearing and the pinion (5 or 4) of
the slewing gear with suitable grease according to the lubricant table.
u Turn the machine on and operate the slewing gear in both directions.
w The open gear and pinion are evenly lubricated.
5.11.5 Lubricate the stud bolts

starting.
` Suitable grease is available.
Figure 131 Stud bolts and grease collars
1 External stud bolts

2 Internal stud bolts
3 Bearing lubrication grease collar
u Lubricate the nuts, washers and projecting threads of the external (1) and
internal (2) stud bolts with suitable grease.
NOTE
4 To lubricate nuts, washers and projecting threads of the external (1) and
internal (2) stud bolts, use "Never-Seez" (Blue Moly) paste.
299 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.11.6 Checking bearing lubrication

starting.
` Suitable grease according to the lubricant table is available.
` A suitable grease gun is available.
Figure 132 Stud bolts and grease collars
1 External stud bolts

2 Internal stud bolts
3 Bearing lubrication grease collar
u Check the bearing lubrication grease collar (3).

w If a grease collar is visible, no further action is required.
w If no grease collar is visible, check the central lubrication system or fill
with suitable grease according to the lubricant table with a grease gun via
the grease nipple until the grease collar is visible.
Figure 133 Bearing lubrication grease collar
1 Grease collar
u After each grease nipple, turn the machine by 45° to distribute the grease.
w Grease collar is visible.
LHM 550_001 300

Maintenance
5.12 Hoisting gear
Figure 134 Winch HL104NL70S2 (example)
1 Vent valve
2 Oil dipstick, oil filler
3 Oil filler, overflow and drain for hoisting gear brake
4 Oil drain
301 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.12.1 Checking hoisting gear oil level

starting.
CAUTION
Damage to gearbox.

cant table and instructions (see chapter: Maintenance, Hoisting gear,
Topping up hoisting gear oil).
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 550_001 302

Maintenance
5.12.2 Topping up hoisting gear oil

starting.
` Make sure suitable oil according to the lubricant table is available.
u Clean the area around the oil dipstick, oil filler (2).
CAUTION
Damage to gearbox.
u Open the vent valve (1).
u Top up with suitable oil according to the lubricant table, placing a suitable
funnel in the oil filler (2).
u Wait 5 minutes.

cant table and instructions (see chapter: Maintenance, Hoisting gear,
Topping up hoisting gear oil).
u Close the vent valve.
u Reinsert the oil dipstick.
Disposal
regulations.
303 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.12.3 Draining the hoisting gear oil

starting.
` An oil drain hose is to hand.
u Open the vent valve (1).
CAUTION
Damage to gearbox.
u Place a suitable collecting container in position.
u Remove the protective cap from the oil drain (4).
u Attach the oil drain hose.

w Oil drains out.
u Detach the oil drain hose and replace the protective cap.
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 550_001 304

Maintenance
5.13 Travelling gear
Figure 135 Driven wheel set
1 Grease nipples (2x)

3 Suspension cylinder piston rod
4 Wheel nut
5 Drain plug
7 Gear oil dip stick
NOTE
4 All maintenance intervals as per maintenance schedule.
305 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.13.1 Checking the wheel set gear oil level

starting.
` The wheel set is horizontal both lengthwise and crosswise.
u Clean the area around the oil dipstick.
CAUTION
Damage to gearbox.

Disposal
regulations.
LHM 550_001 306

Maintenance
5.13.2 Topping up the wheel set gear oil

starting.
u Insert a suitable funnel in the dip stick opening.
u Top up with suitable gear oil according to the lubricant table.
CAUTION
Damage to gearbox.
u Put the oil dipstick back in as far as it will go and wait 5 minutes.

Disposal
regulations.
307 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.13.3 Draining the wheel set gear oil

starting.
` A sufficiently large collecting container is available.
CAUTION
Damage to gearbox.
u Position a sufficiently large collecting container under the drain plug.
u Drain the gear oil into the collecting container which you have placed ready.
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 550_001 308

Maintenance
5.13.4 Checking the wheel set suspension cylinder
CAUTION
Excessive oil pressure in the hydraulic circuit of the suspension cylinders
will damage the cylinders, pipes and valves.
4 Measure the setting of the suspension cylinders and correct if necessary.
u Check each axle set individually.
NOTE
Each machine can have 3 or 4 axle sets.
4 The number of axle sets is set in the factory and must not be changed.
4 If in doubt contact Liebherr service department.

starting.
` The machine is standing on firm and level ground.
` The machine is standing on the tyres and is not supported.
` Travelling mode is selected.
` The boom is in the position intended for travelling mode.
Figure 136 Suspension cylinder on driven wheel set
1 Suspension cylinder
2 Piston rod
H = distance between suspension cylinder and marking (groove) on the piston

rod
u Measure distance H on each wheel set of the axle set.
u Distance H is 100mm ± 10mm.

w Result is satisfactory. No further action needed.
u Distance H is less than 80mm.

w Adjust the suspension cylinder to the correct value (see Adjusting the
wheel set suspension cylinder).
309 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.13.5 Adjusting the wheel set suspension cylinder
CAUTION
Excessive oil pressure in the hydraulic circuit of the suspension cylinders
will damage the cylinders, pipes and valves.
4 Measure the setting of the suspension cylinders and correct if necessary.

starting.
` The machine is standing on the tyres and is not supported.
` Travelling mode is selected.
` The boom is in the position intended for travelling mode.
Figure 137 Axle sets
1 Wheel set level adjusting valve (underside of undercarriage)

2 Hand lever of wheel set level adjusting valve (underside of under
carriage)
3 Axle set hydraulic valve (underside of undercarriage, lead-sealed)
4 Single axle set
5 Combined axle set
LHM 550_001 310

Maintenance
NOTE
Each machine can have 3 or 4 axle sets.
4 The number of axle sets is set in the factory and must not be changed.
4 Do not operate lead-sealed valves (3).
4 If in doubt contact Liebherr service department.
u Support the machine so that all wheel sets are lifted off the ground (see
chapter: Operation, Supporting the machine).
u Fit the hand lever of the wheel set level adjusting valve (underside of under
carriage) (2) as shown in the diagram illustrating the axle sets.
u Using the hand lever of the wheel set level adjusting valve (underside of un
dercarriage) (2), fully retract and extend the wheel sets twice.
w Air escapes from the hydraulic system.
u Fully retract all axle sets.
u Place machine on wheel sets.

w Support not active.
w Support pads raised.
w Wheel sets are in contact with the ground.
u All axle sets extended.

w Whole weight of the machine is lifted by the wheel sets.
NOTE
4 If the total weight of the machine is too great, use the help of the support.
Figure 138 Suspension cylinder on driven wheel set
1 Suspension cylinder
2 Piston rod
H = distance between suspension cylinder and marking (groove) on the piston

rod
u Add together distances H of the measured wheel sets of the axle set and
make sure that the total of distances H of the axle set is within the tolerance
(100mm ± 10mm / wheel set). (See following example).
311 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
Example:
Number of wheel sets of axle set: 5
Tolerance: 5 x 100mm ± 10mm = 500mm ± 50mm
Result: The total of the individual distances H must be between 450mm and
550mm.
u Add together distances H of the individual wheel sets within the axle set and
compare with the calculated tolerance.
w Total lies within the tolerance - no further action required.
w Total does not lie within the tolerance - repeat all previous steps (start the
procedure from the beginning).
5.13.6 Manual greasing of wheel set drive units

starting.
` A grease gun and suitable grease according to the lubricant table are
available.
Figure 139 Wheel set drive unit (non-driven wheel set)
1 Drive units
2 Grease nipple
u Detach the lubrication lines from the wheel sets.
u Place the grease gun on the grease nipple.
u Grease the drive units with the grease gun.

w Grease can be seen escaping from the sealing lips.
u Support the machine so that wheel sets are raised and wheel sets rotate.
w The grease is distributed.
u Place the grease gun on the grease nipple again and re-grease.
w Grease can be seen escaping from the sealing lips.
LHM 550_001 312

Maintenance
5.13.7 Lubricating wheel set axles and links

starting.
` It is supported and the wheel sets are raised.
available.
Figure 140 Driven wheel set

3 Suspension cylinder piston rod
4 Wheel nut
5 Drain plug
7 Gear oil dip stick
u Place the grease gun on the grease nipple.
u Top up with suitable grease according to the lubricant table.
313 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.13.8 Wheel nuts

starting.
` A suitable torque wrench is available.
u Tighten all wheel nuts of the wheel sets (driven and non-driven) with a tor
que of 500 - 550Nm.
5.13.9 Tyres, tyre pressure

starting.
` A compressor with pressure display is available.
u Check all tyres of the wheel sets (driven and non-driven) for damage.
NOTE
4 Always be careful of sharp objects (broken glass, nails, screws, etc.) on
the ground to avoid damage to the tyres.
u Check that all tyres of the wheel sets (driven and non-driven) are at the
prescribed pressure of 10bar and correct if necessary.
5.13.10 Tyre tread depth

starting.
` Tread gauge is available.
u Measure the tyre tread depth with a tread gauge.

w Tyre tread depth is more than 1mm - no further action is required.
w Tyre tread depth is less than 1mm - replace tyres.
LHM 550_001 314

Maintenance
5.14 Hydraulic system
CAUTION
Hydraulic oil escaping under high pressure!
Burns and open wounds!
4 Only inspect the hydraulic system with the drive at rest.
4 Never touch a leaking part of the hydraulic system with unprotected parts
of the body.
Figure 141 Overview of hydraulic tank
1 Return filter (2x)

2 Filling capacity sensor
3 Air filter (2x)
4 Sight glass maximum for checking oil level
5 Sight glass minimum for checking oil level with Pactronic*
6 Sight glass minimum for checking oil level
5.14.1 Initial filling of hydraulic oil
The information sign on the hydraulic tank filler neck displays the hydraulic oil
with which the machine was first filled.
If the initial filling was carried out by Liebherr, the machine will have been filled
with Liebherr Hydraulic 37 or higher grade hydraulic oil as standard. In exceptio
nal cases (low temperature package, bio application) the machine is initially
filled with a special hydraulic oil.
315 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.14.2 Mixing hydraulic oil
CAUTION
Mixing of ester-based, rapidly biodegradable third-party oils with mineral oils!
Possible damage to hydraulic system.
4 Do not mix rapidly biodegradable third-party oils** from different
manufacturers.
4 Do not mix rapidly biodegradable third-party oils** with mineral oils.
Use of a rapidly biodegradable hydraulic oil must be cleared in advance with

Liebherr after-sales service.
NOTE
Plant-based oils:
4 must not be used because of their poor temperature stability.
Mixing Liebherr hydraulic oils

Liebherr oils + Liebherr oils Can be mixed in any ratio
Liebherr oils + biodegradable Liebherr oils Can be mixed in any ratio.
To ensure biodegradability, do not add more than 2%.
Liebherr oils + third-party oils** To ensure that oil properties are not altered, do not
add more than 10%.
**Oils from other manufacturers
5.14.3 Checking the hydraulic oil level

starting.
` The machine is standing on the wheel sets and the supporting cylinders
are retracted.
` The luffing cylinder is retracted.
If the above conditions are not fulfilled, the hydraulic oil level will not be correct.
u Check the hydraulic oil level with the middle sight glass on the hydraulic
tank.
w If the middle sight glass is completely filled with hydraulic oil, no further
action is required.
w If the middle sight glass is filled with hydraulic oil only partially or not at
all, top up with suitable hydraulic oil according to the lubricant table and
instructions (see chapter: Maintenance, Hydraulic oil, Topping up the hy
draulic oil) until hydraulic oil is visible in the upper sight glass.
LHM 550_001 316

Maintenance
5.14.4 Topping up with hydraulic oil
NOTE
4 Before changing from “mineral oil-based hydraulic oil” to “synthetic-based
hydraulic oil”, please contact Liebherr after sales service.
CAUTION
Hydraulic oil topped up incorrectly!
Damage to the hydraulic system.
4 Only top up hydraulic oil via the return filter.
starting.
` Suitable tools are available (torque wrench 69Nm).
` The machine is secured to prevent unauthorised operation.
CAUTION
Engine parts and hydraulic oil may be hot:
Risk of burns and scalding.
4 Do not open the cover of the return filter unless the engine is switched off
and the temperature of the hydraulic oil is 40° or less.
4 Wear suitable protective equipment.
u Remove all cylinder screws from the return filter cover..
CAUTION
Dirt and foreign bodies in return filter!
4 Make sure the return filter is free of dirt and foreign bodies.
u Remove the return filter cover.
CAUTION
Incorrect hydraulic oil.
4 Top up with suitable hydraulic oil only.
4 Do not add any additives or concentrates.
u Top up the hydraulic oil.

u Replace the return filter cover and align it so that the screw holes match.
u Tighten the screws by hand.
u Tighten the screws with a torque of 69Nm.
u Start the engine and leave it to idle for at least 2 minutes.
u Check hydraulic system for leaks.
u Turn off the engine and restart it after 5 minutes.
u Re-check the hydraulic system for leaks.
317 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.14.5 Draining the hydraulic oil

starting.
` The gearbox oil is at normal operating temperature.
available.
Disposal
regulations.
Figure 142 Hydraulic tank - oil drain valve
1 Oil drain valve

capacity) under the oil drain valve (1).
u Open (remove) the cover of the oil drain valve (1).
u Connect the drain hose from the Liebherr tool kit to the oil drain valve (as
soon as it is connected, oil flows out).
u Drain the hydraulic oil.
u Close the cover of the oil drain valve.
LHM 550_001 318

Maintenance
5.14.6 Hydraulic oil return filter

If the hydraulic oil return filter is dirty, a text message appears and an acoustic
warning signal sounds.
CAUTION
Hot hydraulic oil escaping under high pressure.
4 Wait a few minutes until the pressure has fallen to 0 bar and the
temperature of the hydraulic oil is no more than 40°C.

` The boom is lowered.
starting.
` The pressure of the hydraulic oil is 0 bar.
` The temperature of the hydraulic oil is 40°C.
` Suitable tools are available.
` An original Liebherr return filter is available.
Figure 143 Hydraulic oil return filter

1 Screw with circlip
2 Filter cover
3 Sealing ring
4 Magnetic rod
5 Compression spring
6 Pressure flange
7 O-ring
8 Filter element
9 Filter housing
319 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
u Undo screws.
u Carefully remove the filter cover and the sealing ring lying underneath it.
CAUTION
u Remove the magnetic rod, compression spring, pressure flange, O-ring and
the used filter element from the filter housing.
u Check the magnetic rod for metal dust and clean with a clean, lint-free cloth.
u Clean all parts thoroughly.
u Check the O-ring and sealing ring for damage, replace if necessary.
u Clean the inside of the filter housing thoroughly.
u Insert a new original filter element.
u Reassemble the parts in the reverse order.
u Check to make sure the O-ring and sealing ring are clean and seated cor
rectly.
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 550_001 320

Maintenance
5.14.7 Hydraulic oil pressure filter

If the hydraulic oil pressure filter is dirty, a text message appears and an acou
stic warning signal sounds.
Figure 144 Hydraulic oil pressure filter installation location
1 Hydraulic oil filter for steering system

2 Hydraulic oil filter for feed pressure
The pressure filters are in the machinery house on the wall to the tower oppo
site the aggregate:
` Pressure filter for feed pressure.
` Pressure filter for steering system.
CAUTION

` The boom is lowered.
starting.
321 LHM 550_001

Maintenance

` An original Liebherr oil pressure filter is available.
Figure 145 Feed pressure / steering system hydraulic oil pressure filter
1 Clogging indicator
2 Filter housing upper section
3 Sealing ring
4 O-ring
5 Filter element
6 Filter housing lower section (size varies between steering system
and feed pressure)
u Undo screws.
u Carefully remove the filter cover and the sealing ring lying underneath it.
CAUTION
u Remove the magnetic rod, compression spring, pressure flange, O-ring and
the used filter element from the filter housing.
u Check the magnetic rod for metal dust and clean with a clean, lint-free cloth.
u Clean all parts thoroughly, check the O-ring and sealing ring for damage,
replace where appropriate.
LHM 550_001 322

Maintenance
u Clean the inside of the filter housing thoroughly.
u Insert a new original filter element.
u Reassemble the parts in the reverse order.
u Check to make sure the O-ring and sealing ring are clean and seated cor
rectly.
Disposal
regulations.
323 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.14.8 Testing the pressure accumulator
LHM machines have 2 types of pressure accumulator:

` Pressure accumulator for feed pressure (under aggregate).
` Pressure accumulator for emergency operation (tower).
Figure 146 Accumulator
1 Connection for pressure gauge

2 Wall mount
3 Pressure accumulator for emergency operation (tower)
4 Drain valve
5 Connection for pressure gauge
6 Pressure accumulator for feed pressure (under aggregate)
WARNING
Incorrect handling of the accumulator can cause
explosion and bursting.
4 Maintenance work on the accumulator must only be carried out by trained
maintenance personnel.
4 In case of uncertainty contact Liebherr after sales service.

starting.
` Suitable tools and measuring instruments (pressure gauge) are available.
CAUTION
LHM 550_001 324

Maintenance
CAUTION
Dirt and foreign bodies in hydraulic system.
4 Make sure the hydraulic system is free of dirt and foreign bodies.
Testing pressure accumulator emergency operation

u Depressurise the hydraulic system (engine off).
u Drain the oil from the accumulator (drain valve open).
u Detach the hydraulic connections.
u Detach the wall mount.
u Connect the pressure gauge to the pressure gauge connection point.
u Compare the actual pressure displayed by the pressure gauge with the
target pressure indicated by the operating data of the accumulator.
w If the actual pressure displayed by the pressure gauge is less than the
target pressure indicated by the operating data of the accumulator,
change the accumulator.
Testing the accumulator feed pressure

NOTE
If detaching the hydraulic connection causes oil to leak
4 use the vacuum pump.
u Detach wall mount.
u Connect the pressure gauge to the pressure gauge connection point.
u Compare the actual pressure displayed by the pressure gauge with the
target pressure indicated by the operating data of the accumulator.
w If the actual pressure displayed by the pressure gauge is less than the
target pressure indicated by the operating data of the accumulator,
change the accumulator.
325 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.14.9 Changing the accumulator
WARNING
Incorrect handling of the accumulator can cause
explosion and bursting.
4 Maintenance work on the accumulator must only be carried out by trained
maintenance personnel.
NOTE
General
4 Concerning the accumulator maintenance and service intervals, observe
national regulations or the Liebherr maintenance schedule.
4 New accumulators must be filled to the necessary pressure by the
manufacturer before being put into operation.
4 The operating data (pressure, fluid, etc.) must be marked clearly and
legibly on the accumulator.
LHM machines have 2 types of pressure accumulator:

` Pressure accumulator for feed pressure (under aggregate).
` Pressure accumulator for emergency operation (tower).

starting.
` Original Liebherr accumulators are available.
CAUTION

u Drain the oil from the accumulator (drain valve open).
u Detach the wall mount.
u Replace accumulators with new original Liebherr accumulators and connect
to the hydraulic system and wall mount.
LHM 550_001 326

Maintenance
u Accumulators must be thoroughly cleaned on the outside so that the mar

kings and operating data are clearly visible.
CAUTION
Dirt and foreign bodies in hydraulic system.
4 Make sure the hydraulic system is free of dirt and foreign bodies.
5.14.10 Hydraulic cylinders

starting.
` Anti-corrosion agent is available.
NOTE
Anti-corrosion agent
4 Liebherr recommends CORTEC VCI 369 (ID 861008614).
CAUTION
Dirt and lack of corrosion protection
are liable to damage the hydraulic cylinders.
4 Ensure that the hydraulic cylinders are free from dirt and have adequate
corrosion protection.
The following hydraulic cylinders require maintenance:

` Supporting cylinders (for support pads)
` Hydraulic cylinders of the outriggers
` Suspension cylinders of the wheel sets
` Luffing cylinders
u Clean the cylinder pistons thoroughly.
u Treat the cylinder pistons with a suitable anti-corrosion agent.
u Fully extend and retract the cylinder pistons 2-3 times.

w The pistons of the hydraulic cylinders are now treated.
NOTE
Luffing cylinders
4 To service the luffing cylinders, lay down the boom. (See chapter:
Operation, Laying down the boom).
327 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.14.11 Hydraulic hoses and hose lines
Hydraulic hoses and hose lines are subject to a natural ageing process. Their
storage life and useful life are therefore limited:
` The useful life is 6 years (note the date of manufacture on hoses).
` Useful life will be shortened by use at the limit of permitted stress (very
high/low temperatures, high pulse frequencies, multi-shift operation, etc.).
CAUTION
Repairing hydraulic hoses and hose lines
is liable to cause damage and injury.
4 Hydraulic hoses and hose lines should only be renewed.
4 Use only original Liebherr spare parts.
Check hydraulic hoses and hose lines for the following:

` Damage to the outer layer as far as the reinforcement (chafing, cuts and
cracks, etc.).
` Degradation of the outer layer (formation of cracks in the hose material,
etc.).
` Deformation in the pressurised and depressurised state, and at bends
that do not correspond to the original state of the hydraulic hose or hose
line (layer separation, bubble formation, etc.).
` Leaks.
` Damage or deformation of the hose fitting which reduces the strength of
the fitting or the hose/fitting connection.
` Hose straying out of the fitting.
` Corrosion of the fitting which reduces its efficiency or strength.
` Exceeding of storage period and useful life.
u In any of the situations mentioned above, the hydraulic hoses and hose lines
must be renewed.
NOTE
If detaching the hydraulic connection causes oil to leak
4 use the vacuum pump.
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 550_001 328

Maintenance
5.14.12 Oil diagnosis system
NOTE
First oil change
4 Do not delay the first oil change of the unit in question, because increased
contamination occurs during the running-in period.
Functions of the oil diagnosis system:

` To prevent machine failures.
` To reduce downtimes.
` To minimise repair costs.
` To highlight abnormal wear patterns.
` To identify potential causes of damage in good time.
Taking an oil sample

starting.
` The relevant unit has been warmed up for approx. 15 minutes.
` An original Liebherr oil diagnosis kit is available.
u Take the oil samples either directly from the housing of the relevant unit or
from the oil that is drained out when the oil is changed.
u Drain off at least a 1/4 litre of oil before taking the sample and then fill the
container with well-mixed oil.
Figure 147 Liebherr oil diagnosis kit
1 Plastic syringe container cap

2 Plastic syringe container
3 Syringe neck
4 Adapter
5 Plastic hose
6 Shipping carton
7 Sample data sheet
329 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
u Screw the plastic hose (5) with adapter (4) onto the plastic syringe container
(2).
Figure 148 Taking an oil sample
u Take at least 200ml of oil.
u Complete all sections of the sample data sheet (7).
u Place the oil sample and the sample data sheet into the shipping carton (6)
and send to the pre-printed address.
Oil diagnosis report
The oil diagnosis report contains the detailed results of the oil sample analysis
and provides information about any measures that need to be taken.
Symbol Meaning
Normal
High value, take a second oil sample for cross checking
Oil change needed
Repair needed
LHM 550_001 330

Maintenance
5.15 Electrical system
CAUTION
If you do not turn off the battery main switch
there is a risk of electric shock.
4 Turn of the battery main switch before carrying out any work on the
electrical system.
NOTE
4 Make sure that all components of the electrical system are clean and dry
at all times.
5.15.1 Batteries
In principle the batteries of the LHM machine are maintenance-free. At normal

operating temperatures and with correct regulator voltage there is no need to
top up the water. However, under abnormal operating conditions water is consu
med, therefore the battery must be regularly inspected according to the mainte
nance schedule.

starting.
` The battery main switch is turned off.
` Distilled water and a suitable funnel are available.
` Suitable pole grease is available.
Figure 149 Battery fluid level
u Carry out a visual check of the battery fluid level.

w The fluid level is between the MIN and MAX markings.
w Fluid level is below the MIN marking - top up with distilled water.
CAUTION
If the safety instructions is not followed:
There is a risk of damage to the electrical system.
4 Only top up with distilled water without any additives.
331 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
u Unscrew the cell cap and insert a suitable funnel.

u Top up with distilled water.
w The fluid level should be roughly halfway between the MIN and MAX
markings.
u Reinsert the cell cap.

u Clean the batteries, especially the battery poles and cable clamps, with a dry
cloth.
u Grease the battery poles and cable clamps with suitable pole grease.
CAUTION
Placing tools or other objects on the battery
poses a risk of short-circuit.
4 Make sure there are no tools or other objects on the batteries.
5.15.2 Switch cabinets and termination boxes

starting.
` An original Liebherr filter mat is available.
CAUTION
Wet cleaning of switch cabinets and termination boxes
poses a risk of short-circuit and serious damage to the electrical system.
4 Never carry out wet cleaning of switch cabinets and termination boxes.
4 Only clean switch cabinets and termination boxes with a clean and dry
cloth.
Figure 150 Switch cabinet filter mat cover

1 Screws
2 Filter mat cover
u Undo the 4 screws (1) and remove the filter mat cover (2).
u Replace the old filter mat with a new original Liebherr filter mat.
u Reattach the filter mat cover and fasten with screws.
u Check all screws and clips for tight fit and tighten if necessary.
LHM 550_001 332

Maintenance
5.15.3 Replacing the generator air filter mat

starting.
` An original Liebherr filter mat is available.
Figure 151 Generator filter mat cover
1 Screws
2 Filter mat cover
u Undo the 4 screws (1) and remove the filter mat cover (2).
u Replace the old filter mat with a new original Liebherr filter mat.
u Reattach the filter mat cover and fasten with screws.
u Check all screws for tight fit and tighten if necessary.
5.15.4 Replace fuses and lamps
NOTE
4 Use only original Liebherr spare parts.

starting.
` Original Liebherr spare parts are available.
u Replace faulty fuses and lamps immediately.
u Check that the new part is correctly seated.
5.15.5 Check the emergency stop

` The engine has been switched off, only the ignition is on.
u Press the emergency stop switch with the ignition turned on.
w The monitor goes off. Result is satisfactory.
333 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.15.6 Checking the hoisting limit switch
u Raise the hoisting gear until the hoisting limit switch is reached.
w Status appears on the monitor.
w Stop lifting.
u Lower the hoisting gear until the lifting device reaches the ground.
w Slack rope symbol appears on the monitor.
u Lower the hoisting gear (below crane level).

w Hoisting limit switch is reached.
w Stop lowering.
5.15.7 Check the undercarriage flap (centre ladder)
CAUTION
If the undercarriage flap is opened during crane operation
the slewing gear stops abruptly. The load swings.
4 Do not open the undercarriage flap during crane operation.
u Turn on the ignition.
u Open the undercarriage flap.

5.15.8 Cleaning the monitor
CAUTION
The use of harsh cleaning agents, solvents, petrol, etc.
will damage the monitor.
4 Use a suitable cleaning agent to clean the monitor (as for normal
computer screens).

starting.
` The ignition is turned off.
u Wipe the screen with a moistened cloth.
LHM 550_001 334

Maintenance
5.15.9 Replacing the cable of the boom cable drum
u Lay down boom (see section 'Operation, Laying down the boom').
starting.
` The booms has been laid down and is lying on the ground.
u Unwind and detach the old cable from the boom cable drum.
CAUTION
Non-compliance with safety notes!
Damage to the cable on the boom cable drum.
4 When preparing the cable plug, before inserting the sealing compound
remove the Teflon wrapping (if present) from the individual cores to
ensure better contact of the sealing compound with the core lead
insulation.
4 When rewinding both cables, ensure a minimum distance of 5m.
4 When rewinding both cables, do not use deflection pulleys.
4 When rewinding the two cables, make sure the drums rotate in the same
direction.
4 Do not kink the cables.
4 Do not go below the minimum bending radius for flexible installation of 10
- 12 times the cable diameter.
4 Do not pull the cable over sharp edges or pointed objects.
u Turn on the battery main switch and start the engine.
u Raise the boom.
u Slowly wind and unwind the cable hanging from the boom cable drum 3 ti
mes (see chapter: Operation, Boom cable drum).
u Unwind the cable from the boom cable drum until it is 1m above the ground
and let it hang there without any additional load for at least 30 minutes.
u Again, slowly wind and unwind the cable of the boom cable drum 3 times.
u Attach the cable of the boom cable drum to the load lifting device.
335 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.15.10 Cleaning the undercarriage slip ring unit
CAUTION
Use of wet or damp cleaning cloths
will damage the slip ring unit.
4 Avoid using wet or damp cleaning cloths.
4 Use only dry methods (compressed air or vacuum cleaner) to clean the
slip ring unit.

starting.
` Compressed air or a vacuum cleaner is available.
Figure 152 Slip ring unit
1 Screw
2 Cover
u Remove the screws (1) from the cover (2).
u Remove the cover.
u Clean the slip ring unit with compressed air and a vacuum cleaner.
CAUTION
Dust and dirt particles
can cause eye injuries.
4 Wear protective clothing (particularly safety goggles and a breathing
mask).
u Reattach the cover (2).
u Reinsert the screws, tighten and check for leaks.
LHM 550_001 336

Maintenance
5.16 Emergency devices
5.16.1 Fire extinguishers
Fire extinguishers are subject to national and regional regulations and must be
replaced by the operator.
u Observe the type plates on the fire extinguishers (regarding inspection date).
5.16.2 Rescue equipment
NOTE
To guarantee safe descent in case of emergency:
4 Ensure that the rescue equipment is checked regularly.
See section 'Operation, Emergency exit'.
1 Cover
2 Storage compartment
3 Rescue harness, rope, karabiner
u Have the rescue equipment inspected by a specialist.
u Have the result of the inspection entered in the warranty and inspection
card.
5.16.3 Personal protective equipment
The following maintenance points contribute to functioning and thus to personal

safety:
` Observe the manufacturer's guidelines on care and maintenance of the
protective equipment.
` The protective equipment must only be inspected by a specialist.
` Carry out regular visual checks.
` In case of irreparable damage, replace the protective equipment with new
protective equipment immediately.
` Pay attention to the cleanliness of the protective equipment and clean it if
necessary.
337 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.17 Steel structure
DANGER
Unacceptable repairs
may cause the steel structure to fail.
4 Repairs to steelwork may only be carried out by the Liebherr service
department.

starting.
u Carry out checks at the intervals indicated in the maintenance schedule

(overall machine).
u Check all weld seams according to the weld seam inspection overview
(contained in the Technical Information) by visually examining for cracks
and rust.
w If no cracks or rust are found, no further action is required.
In case of cracks or rust:
u Remove the painting in this area so that the extent of the damage is clearly
visible.
u Contact the Liebherr service department to enquire about the further action
to be taken (magnetic particle inspection, dye penetrant inspection, etc.).
Components to be checked (according to weld seam inspection overview):

` Undercarriage
` Slewing platform
` Tower
` Boom
` Luffing cylinders
LHM 550_001 338

Maintenance
5.18 Central lubrication system
The central lubrication systems provide the necessary lubrication to the fol
lowing units:
` Undercarriage
` Slewing platform
` Tower
` Boom
NOTE
Central lubrication system
4 The number of central lubrication systems depends on the size of the
machine.
Figure 153 Central lubrication system
1 Pump control
2 Refill connection (grease nipple)
3 Supply container
4 Maximum fill level marker
A Rotary control knob for setting the lubrication time in minutes
B Rotary control knob for setting the pause time in hours
CAUTION
Incorrect time settings
are liable to wreck the bearings and units.
4 Do not change the factory-set times of the central lubrication systems.
339 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.18.1 Topping up grease
CAUTION
If air and dirt get into the lubrication system,
bleed and clean the lubrication lines. Risk of damage:
4 Ensure that the central lubrication system is not empty.

starting.
available.
u Check the fill level of the central lubrication system.
u If the fill level is below the maximum fill level marker, fill the central lubrica
tion system with suitable grease according to the lubricant table until the ma
ximum fill level is reached.
LHM 550_001 340

Maintenance
5.19 Boom
CAUTION
Non-observance of safety notes!
Serious injury.
4 Boom access is only permitted for maintenance personnel and for
inspections.
4 When climbing the boom, make sure the maintenance ladder is firmly
attached.
4 Fasten the safety belt.
4 Before starting up, make sure there are no parts such as tools etc. on the
boom which could fall down.

starting.
` The boom is lowered, the boom head lying on the ground.
` The oil is at normal operating temperature.
` A suitable funnel is available for topping up oil.
` Suitable gear oil according to the lubricant table is available.
5.19.1 Check the oil level of the boom cable drum.
Figure 154 Checking the oil of the boom cable drum

1 Vent screw
2 Hose
3 Sight glass for checking oil level with boom laid down
4 Sight glass for checking oil level with boom in horizontal position
(not laid down)
5 Oil drain screw
341 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
u Check oil level with sight glass (3) on the boom cable drum.
w Oil halfway up sight glass - no further action required.
w No oil visible in sight glass - top up with suitable oil according to lubricant
table and instructions (see chapter: Maintenance, Boom, Topping up
boom cable drum oil).
5.19.2 Topping up boom cable drum oil

u Remove the venting screw (1).
CAUTION
Damage to gearbox.
u Insert a suitable funnel in the hole for the venting screw which you have
removed.
u Detach the hose (2) at one end.
u Slowly top up via the funnel with suitable oil according to the lubricant table
and wait for the oil to settle.
u Check the oil level level in the sight glass (3 or 4) after 5 minutes.
w Oil halfway up sight glass.
w Oil less than halfway up sight glass - Top up oil according to lubricant ta
ble.
u Remove the funnel.
u Reattach the venting screw and hose.
u Start up the machine and operate the boom cable drum in both directions
(raise/lower).
u Turn off the machine, after 5 minutes check the oil level of the boom cable
drum and top up if necessary.
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 550_001 342

Maintenance
5.19.3 Draining the boom cable drum oil
u Put a suitable and sufficiently large collecting container in position.
u Open the venting screw (1).
CAUTION
Damage to gearbox.
u Open the oil drain screw (5).

w Oil drains out.
Disposal
regulations.
343 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.20 Ropes and pulleys
Ropes and pulleys are very sensitive to mechanical damage.
u Use ropes of the same type and strength as the original equipment.
5.20.1 Checking ropes

starting.
NOTE
4 Ropes are more exposed to mechanical damage near the hook.
u Check ropes and pulleys according to the maintenance schedule for all kinds
of damage, deformation, etc.
5.20.2 Rope discard criteria
DANGER
Failure to discard the rope when it has reached the end of its service life!
Load breakaway.
4 Replace the rope in good time.
The following points are important when determining whether the rope is due for
replacement:
` National or local regulations in the country of use.
` Environmental conditions.
` Use in the first few weeks after a rope has been put on.
` Results of previous inspections.
` Time for which the rope has been used.
NOTE
If the machine has been standing idle for a long time or incidents have
occurred that are liable to cause damage:
4 Check the rope and end attachments.
LHM 550_001 344

Maintenance
5.20.3 Checking the rope diameter
The rope becomes thinner due to use and associated natural wear and tear. If
the rope diameter has reduced by more than 10% relative to the nominal
dimension as a result of internal friction, corrosion etc., the rope must be
changed.

starting.
` A caliper gauge with wide jaws is available.
Figure 155 Rope diameter: (left) correct measurement, (right) incorrect mea
surement
u Measure the rope diameter at two widely separated points on the rope.
w The rope diameter is determined by calculating the average of four mea
surements.
NOTE
4 Check the rope drive before using new ropes. (See chapter: Maintenance,
Ropes and pulleys, Checking the rope drive)
345 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.20.4 Rope deformations
DANGER
Non-compliance with safety notes!
Load breakaway.
4 Replace the rope in case of rope deformations.
Figure 156 Cage formation
The outer layer of wires is loosened or the outer wire braids are longer than the
inner ones.
Figure 157 Loop formation
Single wires or groups of wires emerge from the rope structure.
Figure 158 Necking
The diameter of the rope is reduced over short lengths.
Figure 159 Knots
Deformations of the wire rope. These are formed when a loop in the rope is
pulled straight without the wire rope being able to compensate for the loop by
turning on its axis.
LHM 550_001 346

Maintenance
Figure 160 Corkscrew
The axis of the unloaded wire rope becomes helical. This prevents the rope
drive from running smoothly. The resultant damage includes increased abrasion
and wire breaks. The rope must be replaced if the deformation at the thinnest
point of the rope exceeds ⅓ of the nominal rope diameter.
5.20.5 Checking for corrosion
DANGER
Corrosion ignored!
Load breakaway.
4 In case of corrosion, change the rope.

starting.
u Check ropes for corrosion.

w Corrosion reduces the rope diameter. If the rope diameter has reduced
by 7% or more relative to the nominal dimension, the rope must be
changed regardless of whether or not wire breaks have occurred.
Figure 161 Atmospheric corrosion
occurs in corrosive and salt water atmospheres (e.g. prolonged storage of

ropes in the open air, salt water atmospheres, etc.). In ropes, a distinction is
made between atmospheric corrosion (produces "even" rusting) and local types
of corrosion such as pitting (forms deep holes at points where the protective
layer is missing or damaged).
Figure 162 Atmospheric corrosion
347 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.20.6 Checking for rope abrasion
DANGER
Rope wear ignored!
Load breakaway.
4 In case of rope abrasion, change the rope.

starting.
u Check ropes for abrasion.

w If the rope diameter has reduced by 7% or more relative to the nominal
dimension, the rope must be changed regardless of whether or not wire
breaks have occurred.
Figure 163 Rope abrasion
Rope abrasion reduces the static breaking force of the rope due to reduction of
the rope diameter and its fatigue limit due to wear grooves.
LHM 550_001 348

Maintenance
5.20.7 Checking for heat damage
DANGER
Impact of heat ignored!
Load breakaway.
4 In case of heat damage, change the rope.

starting.
u Checking ropes for heat damage.
Figure 164 Heat damage
At temperatures above 300°C, the tensile fibre structure of the wire rope
caused by cold deformation recrystallises. The wire loses around ⅔ of its origi
nal strength.
Figure 165 Heat damage in case of lightning strike
In case of lightning strike the rope is heated locally so that the wire starts to
melt.
349 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.20.8 Checking the number of permitted wire breaks
NOTE
When putting on a new wire rope:
4 The rope diameter, breaking load and number of bearing wires in the
outer strands must match those of the original rope.
4 Contact the Liebherr service department or the rope manufacturer to find
out how many bearing wires there are in the outer strands.
The table below shows the permitted number of wire breaks relative to a de
fined control section of the rope.
Taken from ISO 4309:2004
Rope category Number of bearing wires in Number of permitted wire Control section
the outer strands breaks
9 201-220 9 6 x rope diameter
9 201-220 18 30 x rope diameter
Example:
Rope diameter D is 30 mm
Number of wires in the outer strands: 210
This means that over a control section measuring 6 x D = 180 mm [7"] the num
ber of permitted wire breaks may not be higher than 9, or over a control length
of
30 x D = 900 mm [2 12"] it may not be higher than 18.
u Check ropes for the number of wire breaks and compare with the values in
the table.
LHM 550_001 350

Maintenance
Taken from ISO 4309: B.2

Crane serial number Date rope
fitted Rope details (see ISO 17893 for rope information)
yy/mm/dd
RCNa Nominal Manufacturer Core b Quality b Alignment and pos

diameter ition b
IWRC
……………………………………… mm
……………………. FC
Right: sZ ZZ Z
…………………………………… WSC
… Left: zS sS S
Type of use …………... …………... Construction Non-galvanised
Date discarded Galvanised, grease
……………………………………… yy/mm/dd ……………………………………
…
End type(s): Permitted reduction

of diameter 10% or 3
………………………. Number of permitted outer wire breaks %
.
……………………………………… ……………. in 6d and ……………… in 30d
Visible wire breaks Wear of outer strands Corrosion Damage and de
formation
Date of in Cumulative
spection Number of visible Position Degree c Current Reduction Position Degree c Position Degree c Position Degree c
overall conditionc
wire breaks (length) on rope diameter below nom. on rope on rope on rope
yy/mm/dd diam. %
6d 30d
Name and signature of tester

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
a RCN (Rope Category Number) - see Table 1 and 2 and Appendix E.
b Mark with a cross as applicable
c Type and extent of damage 20 % = slight; 40 % = moderate; 60 % = high; 80 % = very high; or 100 % due for replacement
NOTE
4 Determine and state the extent of damage as a percentage of the discard
criterion.
4 Calculate the cumulative overall condition of the rope by adding the
percentages of the extent of damage previously determined.
4 If the total reaches 100%, discard the rope.
351 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.20.9 Storing ropes
DANGER
Ropes stored incorrectly.
Load breakaway.
4 Only store ropes in dry and well ventilated premises.
4 Do not store ropes out of doors and protect ropes against the
environment.
4 Do not store ropes directly on the floor.
4 If ropes are to be stored for longer than two months, open the packaging
on the underside of the drum to prevent corrosion.
4 Keep the material inspection certificate in a safe place.
4 Check that the labelling of ropes matches the material inspection
certificate and the order.
DANGER
If the marking or labelling of the rope drum is missing,
ropes are liable to be confused. The load may break loose and severe damage
may be caused.
4 Label the affected drums immediately in accordance with the delivery
documentation.
5.20.10 Transporting ropes
Ropes are very susceptible to external damage, therefore great care must be
taken when they are lifted, transported or unloaded.
` Lift drums with soft slings or round slings.
` Insert spindle through the centre of the drum.
` Lift rope drums with a forklift.
Figure 166 Lifting rope drums
LHM 550_001 352

Maintenance
5.20.11 Winding ropes
DANGER
If the wire ropes are not handled correctly:
the load may break loose and severe damage may be caused.
4 Wind ropes according to the instructions.

NOTE
Do not let rope get dirty.
4 Do not pull the rope along the ground.
u Lay ropes without twisting and without causing damage to the outside.
Figure 167 Winding ropes without brake

A Unwind from the rope drum in the winding direction.
B Unwind ropes from a jacked up drum.
C Unwinding to the side causes the rope to twist and leads to kink
formation.
Figure 168 Winding ropes with brake

A Correct winding with brake
B Incorrect winding with brake
353 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.20.12 Checking the rope drive
The service life of the rope depends to a large extent on checking of the rope
drive. Any fault on the rope drive will damage the rope. The rope will reach the
end of its service life more quickly due to increased wear.
u Check the grooves of the winching drums and the pulleys for wear using test
templates.
NOTE
4 Test templates are related to the nominal groove base diameter.
Checking winch drum groove base for wear

starting.
` A test template is available.
Figure 169 Acceptable test result

1 Test template
2 Winch drum
Test template(1) fits easily into the groove of the winch drum (2). Diameter of
the test template is more or less congruent with the groove base. The groove
diameter of the winch drum is 4 - 8 % larger than the test template diameter.
u Use the test template to check each individual groove on the winch drum.
Figure 170 Unacceptable test result

1 Test template
2 Winch drum
LHM 550_001 354

Maintenance
If the diameter of the test template is not the same as the groove base of the
winch drum, a crescent-shaped gap is visible:
u Remove the rope.
u Smooth the surface of the grooves.
u Contact Liebherr service department.
Rope tensioning pulleys of the winch drums

starting.
u Checking the rope tensioning pulleys for wear

w Rope tensioning pulleys are evenly worn and do not show any extreme
grooving, etc. The result is satisfactory. No further action required.
w Rope tensioning pulleys are unevenly worn. if the rope tensioning pulleys
press down heavily on the rope in the rope guide, the rope drive will not
function properly. The rope tensioning pulleys should be replaced.
Checking pulleys for ease of movement

u Check pulleys for ease of movement.
w Pulleys move easily. No further action required.
w Pulleys do not move easily. Lubricate the pulley bearings (see chapter:
Lubricating the pulleys)
355 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.20.13 Wear of steel pulleys

starting.
Figure 171 Checking steel pulleys for wear
1 Test template
2 Steel pulley
A Maximum permissible wear on pulley
u Check the steel pulleys with a test template (see chapter: Checking winch
drum groove base for wear).
w The maximum permitted wear A is 4% of the nominal rope diameter. No
further action required.
w The maximum permitted wear A is greater than 4 % of the nominal rope
diameter. Contact Liebherr service department and change the pulleys.
NOTE
Negative imprint: Rope pulleys
4 The rope groove exhibits a negative imprint of the rope. Imprints of the
strands are desirable. They result in a larger rope contact area and
increase the service life of the rope. When changing ropes, remove ridges
and smooth sharp edges on the surface of the pulleys.
LHM 550_001 356

Maintenance
5.20.14 Wear of plastic pulleys

starting.
1 Test template
2 Plastic pulley
A Maximum permissible wear on pulley
u Check the steel pulleys with a test template (see chapter: Checking winch
drum groove base for wear).
w The maximum permitted wear A is 50% of the nominal rope diameter. No
w The maximum permitted wear A is greater than 50% of the nominal rope
diameter. Contact Liebherr service department and change the pulleys.
NOTE
Negative imprint: Rope pulleys
4 The rope groove exhibits a negative imprint of the rope. Imprints of the
strands are desirable. They result in a larger rope contact area and
increase the service life of the rope. When changing ropes, remove ridges
and smooth sharp edges on the surface of the pulleys.
357 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.20.15 Checking pulleys for damage
Pulleys are susceptible to external damage.

starting.
u Make sure that pulleys do not chafe anywhere.
u Do not place pulleys on the ground without protective devices.
Figure 172 Damaged pulley
u Check rope pulleys for all kinds of damage (nicks, wobbles, etc.)
w If the rope pulleys are aligned with the direction in which the rope is
running and there is no evidence of wobble or other damage: No further
action required.
w The rope pulleys show signs of damage. Contact Liebherr service de
partment and change the pulleys.
LHM 550_001 358

Maintenance
5.20.16 Lubricating pulley bearings

Pulleys must turn easily to provide optimum rope drive. If the pulleys are not
lubricated by the central lubrication system, they must be lubricated manually
with a grease gun.
NOTE
4 The central lubrication system lubricates the pulley bearings (see chapter:
Operation, Central lubrication system).
u Lay down the boom..

starting.
` A hand lever grease pistol filled with suitable grease according to the
lubricant table (see chapter: Lubricant table) is available.
Lubricating pulleys manually

u Lubricate the pulley bearings on the tower head and boom head via the gre
ase nipples using a hand lever grease pistol.
w Make sure that grease does not not leak from between the pulleys.
5.20.17 Cleaning plastic pulleys

starting.
` Suitable cleaning agent and cleaning cloths are available.
u Cleaning plastic pulleys with suitable cleaning agent and cleaning cloths to
prevent excessive wear of the plastic pulleys.
Plastic pulleys are resistant to:

` Mineral oil
` Petrol
` Kerosene
` Diesel
Plastic pulleys are not resistant or have only limited resistance to:
` Concentrated mineral acids (e.g. sulphuric acid, hydrochloric acid, nitric
acid)
` Concentrated organic acids (e.g. formic acid)
` Concentrated bases (e.g. sodium, caustic potash solution or corrosive
potassium salts)
` Alcohol other than ethyl alcohol, methyl alcohol and propyl alcohol
` Inorganic chlorides (e.g. calcium, lithium chloride, magnesium chloride
and zinc chloride)
359 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.20.18 Luffing ropes

When luffing the rope, pay attention to the following points:
` Make sure that the rope does not become untwined or twisted.
` If an auxiliary rope is used, make sure the permitted tensile force is app
lied (at least the weight of the rope).
u Luff the new rope with the help of the old rope or an auxiliary rope.
CAUTION
Rope deflection angle greater than 4°:
Material damage.
4 Position the pulley as far away as possible and without any lateral
deflection.
u Lay down the boom..

starting.
` Wear suitable protective clothing.
u Check rope for damage due to improper handling or storage.
CAUTION
Sudden movement as rope end comes off drum!
4 Unwind the rope from the rope drum carefully and as slowly as possible.
Welding rope eyes
CAUTION
Butt-welded ropes!
4 Weld eyes between two connections (ropes).
4 A rope stocking may be used (the rope stocking manufacturer's
instructions must be followed).
NOTE
4 Observe the reeving plan according to the technical information.
u Luff the ropes in such a way that the ends of all ropes are at the same
height when loaded (at least the load on the swing gear or the hook cross
bar).
w If the difference between the rope ends is no more than +/- 20 mm: No
w If the difference between the rope ends is more than +/- 20 mm: Equalize
the rope lengths at the winch fixing.
LHM 550_001 360

Maintenance
u Check that the new wire rope is laid correctly in the grooves of the rope
drums or pulleys.
u Have the limit switches checked and adjusted by by personnel authorised by
Liebherr.
u Hoist a light load (not more than 10% of full load) and check the winding of
the wire rope onto the winch drum.
5.20.19 Lubricate ropes

Regular rope maintenance ensures safe operation of the crane and increases
the service life of the rope.
` A cleaning brush is available.
` Suitable lubricant is available (see following table)
Manufacturer Make
Agip Precis
Amity UK Ltd. PCL
Amity UK Ltd. IKV Ramca 250 Spray
BP Stemkor 171
Bremer & Leguil Rivolta S.K.M 17
ELASKON UNOLIT 130
EUROL TW FLUID
Exxon-Mobil Mobiltac 375 NC
Fuchs Cedracon
Fuchs Ceplattyn KG 10
Fuchs Ceplattyn KG 10 HMF-C
Nyrosten Nyrosten N 113
Shell Enesis R Type: RB0015
Shell Enesis RX Type: RB003
Total Osyris DWX 9000
Van Meeuwen Bel-Ray Wire rope Lubricant
u Apply extra lubrication in the areas where the ropes bend around the winch
drums and the pulleys.
u Apply grease with a brush. In special cases a high-pressure lubricating de
vice is used (Follow the manufacturer's instructions). An alternative is to use
solvent-based lubricants that can be sprayed on the rope.
u Observe maintenance intervals (See chapter: Maintenance, Maintenance
schedule).
NOTE
Third-party ropes
4 Select lubricants according to the recommendations of the rope
manufacturer concerned or contact the Liebherr service department.
CAUTION
Broken wires and damaged spots on rope.
Danger of injury when cleaning.
4 Wear protective clothing (especially protective gloves).
4 Use a brush for cleaning.
361 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.21 Checking the Nemag shackle
As the link between the rope and the lifting device, the Nemag shackle is ex
posed to particularly heavy stresses.
DANGER
Incorrect maintenance of the Nemag shackle!
Load breakaway.
4 Observe maintenance intervals and safety notices.
4 In case of visible damage, replace the Nemag shackle immediately.

starting.
u Carry out checks at the intervals indicated in the maintenance schedule (lif
ting device + rotator).
u Secure the ropes.
u Detach the relevant lifting device according to the operation manual.
u Detach the Nemag shackle from the rope.
u Check the Nemag shackle for cracks by MPI (magnetic powder inspection).
Figure 173 Nemag shackle - areas to be inspected
1 Areas to be inspected
LHM 550_001 362

Maintenance
5.22 Ventilation, heating and air conditioning
CAUTION
Incorrect maintenance of ventilation, heating and air conditioning system.
Damage to property and health risks.
4 Work on the ventilation, heating and air conditioning system must only be
carried out by authorised Liebherr service personnel.
NOTE
4 Observe the documentation supplied by the manufacturer of the system
concerned.
u Check systems to ensure they are in good working order, free from leaks,
clean and securely seated.
u Check the functioning of ventilation flaps and outlets to ensure they are
clean and in good working order.
363 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.23 Cleaning
To guarantee an even surface quality, clean the machine regularly with a steam
cleaner, especially following work with highly corrosive materials.
CAUTION
Unsuitable cleaning agents!
4 Avoid the use of aggressive and abrasive cleaning agents.
4 Avoid phosphate cleaners.
4 Avoid solvents or cleaning against containing solvents.
4 Use only cleaning agents with a pH below 12.

` The boom is laid down.
starting.
` The machine has cooled down.
u Clean the machine using a steam cleaner.
w Maximum pressure 150 bar, minimum distance 40cm.
w If necessary use a mild cleaning agent (tenside cleaner).
u After cleaning, preserve the machine (see chapter: Maintenance, Anti-corro
sion coating)
CAUTION
Spraying sensitive units with water under high pressure.
4 Do not spray water on the hydraulic, water and air coolers.
4 Do not spray water on any interior spaces (slewing platform, cab, etc.).
4 Do not spray water on any electrical units (on the undercarriage, tower,
etc.).
Disposal
regulations.
Hydraulic, water and air coolers
Type of dirt Method:

Dry dust Clean with compressed air (maximum working pressure 3-4 bar)
Wet dust Clean with steam jet (maximum working pressure 3-4 bar)
Oily dust Clean with steam jet, adding a mild cleaning agent (maximum working pressure 3-4 bar)
LHM 550_001 364

Maintenance
5.24 Corrosion protection
Preservation of the machine is very important to avoid premature wear. To gua

rantee a long service life for the machine, whatever the environmental con
ditions, pay close attention to the corrosion protection (particularly when hand
ling loads with aggressive chemicals or fertilisers or where used near salt water)
Carry out regular inspections. Visual checks of the corrosion protection should
include:
` Checking for dirt
` Looking for damaged paintwork
` Checking the preservation
NOTE
Any defects found during the inspection must be rectified immediately.
4 Painting and repair systems and corrosion protection intervals are shown
in the tables below.
WARNING
Handling anti-corrosion agents can be hazardous for the machine and for
personnel.
4 Observe national and regional legal requirements.
4 Wear suitable work and safety apparel (overall, safety goggles, working
gloves and face mask). Change dirtily clothing.
4 Ensure an adequate supply of fresh air when working with anti-corrosion
agents.
4 Do not eat, drink or smoke while working with anti-corrosion agents.
4 When preserving switch cabinets or termination boxes, turn off the
electrics.
4 Keep containers of anti-corrosion agents away from naked flames, sparks
and other ignition sources.
4 Do not spray anti-corrosion agents onto naked flames or hot parts such
turbochargers, exhaust pipes, etc.
4 In the event of fire, use CO2 extinguishers, foam or a chemical
extinguisher. Never use water! (See also chapter: Safety, Procedure in
the event of fire.)
4 Store all anti-corrosion agents in a cool, dry place (storage temperature
15 - 20°C)
NOTE
4 Observe national and regional safety requirements when carrying out
repairs.
365 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
NOTE
Repairs must only be carried out by persons with technical knowledge /
technical qualifications for corrosion protection.
Liebherr will not accept warranty claims for damage to the machine
(electrical, hydraulic components, etc.) or to the corrosion protection caused
by unqualified personnel.
4 The operator is obliged to ascertain the technical qualifications of the
maintenance personnel and demand corresponding proof.
FIRST AID
In case of injuries due to anti-corrosion agent, observe the following:
Skin contact:
u Rinse with plenty of soap and water
Eye contact:
u Rinse out the anti-corrosion agent immediately with plenty of water and con
tinue to rinse for several minutes.
u Alert the emergency services, or seek medical advice as quickly as possible.
Swallowing:
u Drink plenty of milk or water.
u Do not induce vomiting!
If high concentrations of anti-corrosive agent have been inhaled:
u Take the affected person outside immediately.
Disposal
4 Use sand or a suitable binding agent to absorb any spilled fluids.
regulations.
LHM 550_001 366

Maintenance
5.24.1 Climatic zones
Zone 1:
` Small fluctuations within the climatic zone
` Constant temperature
` Constant, low humidity
` High winds rare
Zone 2:
` Moderate fluctuations within the climatic zone
` Moderate temperature differences
` Relatively constant humidity (moderate fluctuations)
` Occasional high winds
Zone 3:
` Strong fluctuations within the climatic zone
` Strong temperature differences
` Strong fluctuations in humidity and frequently high humidity
` Extreme wind speeds, strongly contaminated wind (saline, aggressive
media such as chemicals, sand, bulk handling, etc.)
` Extreme UV radiation
Anti-corrosion paint inspection intervals in months:
Arctic climate Polar climate Boreal climate Warm tem Subtropical Tropical cli
perate climate climate mate
Interval 6 6 9 12 9 6
Anti-corrosion coating inspection intervals in months:
Arctic climate Polar climate Boreal climate Warm tem Subtropical Tropical cli
perate climate climate mate
Zone 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
Interval - 4 2 - 4 2 9 6 3 18 12 6 6 4 2 - 4 2
367 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
Figure 174 Arctic climate
Figure 175 Polar climate
LHM 550_001 368

Maintenance
Figure 176 Boreal climate
Figure 177 Warm temperate climate
369 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
Figure 178 Subtropical climate
Figure 179 Tropical climate
LHM 550_001 370

Maintenance
5.24.2 Preservation
Area Hot-galvanised and electro- Hot-galvanised and electro-galvanised components, Screws, nuts, washers,
galvanised components screws, nuts, washers etc., bolts, galvanised hydraulic etc., bolts, galvanised hy
with doublings, joints and tubes, SAE screw fittings draulic tubes, SAE screw
gaps, outside surfaces of fittings
unpainted housings
Pretreatment Wash thoroughly with a steam cleaner (cleaning agent IR808s) and rinse with clear water (not salt water). Clean and
degrease with solvent (be careful of seals, O-rings, etc.).
Dry if necessary with dry, oil-free air.
If necessary, remove Sikaflex where it is torn or corroded.
Remove and sand off loose or flaking paint.
Remove any areas of corrosion with sandpaper (60 ć 80 grit) or a wheel sander.
St 2 according to DIN EN ISO 8501 - 1 to 4
With sheet thicknesses < 5 mm, be careful not to cause damage through mechanical removal of corrosion.
Caution: Do not polish
For optimum adhesion of the conservative agent, the surfaces to be preserved must provide a solid substrate.
Coating Product quality: TFD Product quality: TFD Product quality: TFD
Dinitrol 3650 30 μm μm DENSO TAPE μm
Pretreatment
Colour: Colour: Colour:
Transparent Brown
Product quality: TFD Product quality: TFD Product quality: TFD
Dinitrol 4010 50 μm Dinitrol 4010 50 μm DENSO TAPE μm

Preservation
Transparent Transparent Brown
371 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
Area Switch cabinet interior, internal elec Fuel tank: Hydraulic tank:
trical and electronic plug connections Tank inner surfaces (unpainted) Tank inner surfaces (unpainted)
Tank internal components (level Tank internal components (level
sensor, etc.) sensor, etc.)
Pretreatment Clean with a clean, dry cloth. Wash thoroughly with a steam cleaner (cleaning agent IR808s) and rinse with
clear water (not salt water).
Clean and degrease with solvent (be careful of seals, O-rings, etc.).
Remove Sikaflex where it is torn or corroded.
For optimum adhesion of the conservative agent, the surfaces to be preserved must provide a solid substrate.
Only necessary if the crane is shut down for a long period and with partially filled tanks:
μm μm μm
Pretreatment
Transparent
LPS1 approx. 2 μm Fuel approx. 2 μm Hydraulic oil approx. 2 μm
Preservation
Transparent Country-specific Crane-specific
LHM 550_001 372

Maintenance
5.24.3 Recommended conservative agent

Product name: ID no.: Package: Removal:
Dinitrol 3650 8900 368 14 20 l Remove the protective film of Dinitrol 3650
with mineral turpentine and similar solvent
cleaning agents.
Properties: Note:
The thixotropic viscosity characteristics of Dinitrol 3650 provide an anti-corrosion film in wholly or partially closed hollow bodies in which Dinitrol 3650 can be applied by immersion,
the evaporation of the solvent is delayed or even prevented. brushing or spraying. Dinitrol 3650 is only
Excellent penetration properties in joints and gaps is accompanied by moisture-displacing characteristics. Dinitrol 3650 forms a soft, intended for preservation of layered sheet
colourless protective film. Dinitrol 3650 is not weather resistant. ing. After a drying time of 24 hours the pre
served parts must be sealed with Dinitrol
4010.
Dinitrol 4010 8900 369 14 20 l Within 2 weeks of drying the Dinitrol 4010
protective film can be removed with mineral
turpentine. After complete drying the film
resists washing with a steam cleaner with
alkaline additives.
Properties: Note:
Dinitrol 4010 provides a quick-drying, non-tacky protective film that is hard to remove. Dinitrol 4010 can be applied by brushing or
Dinitrol 4010 is particularly suitable for and resistant to large changes in temperature, e.g. for protecting components in aggregates and by airless or airmix spraying.
drive units (from ć35°C to +210°C) and is suitable for all kinds of plastic and rubber parts. Drying time:
dependent on temperature
e.g.: 1 h touch-dry for 40 mμ 15°C ć 30°C
LPS1 8610 099 14 Spray The protective film dries out and does not
need removal.
Properties: Note:
The grease-free protective film protects electrical and electronic components and does not cause short-circuit. LPS1 is applied with an aerosol can.
It provides a dry, thin protective film which is oil, dust and dirt repellent.
Displaces moisture. Gives easy short-term corrosion protection.
DENSO TAPE 6930 589 14 Roll 100mm x 10m Remove the tape and degrease with cold
cleaning solvent or solvent cleaner.
Properties: Note:
A synthetic fabric tape impregnated with anti-corrosion agent. Tape is wound around the parts to be pro
tected.
DENSO TAPE 6032 319 14 Roll 50mm x 10m Remove the tape and degrease with cold
cleaning solvent or solvent cleaner.
Properties: Note:
A synthetic fabric tape impregnated with anti-corrosion agent. Tape is wound around the parts to be pro
tected.
373 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
5.24.4 Coating
Area Welded structures, plates, brack Coated chrome steel and alu Exhaust pipes and silencers
ets, metal panels, etc. Cabin in minium components, galvanised
teriors and exteriors attachments
Pretreatment Wash thoroughly with a steam cleaner (cleaning agent IR808s) and rinse with clear water (not salt water).
Thoroughly clean and degrease with solvent (be careful of seals, O-rings, etc.).
Spot blast areas of corrosion, SA 2 ½ according to DIN EN ISO 8501-1/88.

Roughness must be according to roughness scale, segment 3-4 of the type G comparator as per DIN EN
ISO 8503-1 (peak-to-valley height Ry5: 40 - 85 μm).
With sheet thicknesses < 5 mm, be careful not to cause damage through sand-blasting. Be sure to use the
correct jet pressure and abrasive.
Sand off transitions from paint to steel with an orbital sander (P180 grit).
Sweep-blasting or sanding is required to ensure that paint adheres to all areas to be painted.
Caution: Do not polish.
For optimum adhesion of coatings, the surfaces to be coated must provide a solid substrate.
Amerlock 400AL 80 μm Amercoat 71TC 30 μm Intertherm 50 25 μm

Primer coat, all machine types
Aluminium White Aluminium
Top coat inside, intermediate coat, out Amerlock 400C 80 μm Amerlock 400C 80 μm
side only for marine corrosion protec
tion
RAL 9002 RAL 9002
Amercoat 450E 80 μm Amercoat 450E 80 μm Intertherm 50 25 μm

Top coat outside, all machine types
Light yellow / light grey / RAL 7047* Light yellow / light grey / RAL 7047* Aluminium
Cabin: Cabin:
External RAL 9002 External RAL 9002
Internal RAL 7015*
* Special colours: Ask manufacturer for specification
LHM 550_001 374

Maintenance
Area Welded structures, plates, brack Coated chrome steel and alu Exhaust pipes and silencers
ets, metal panels, etc. Cabin in minium components, galvanised
teriors and exteriors attachments
Spot blast areas of corrosion, SA 2 ½ according to DIN EN ISO 8501-1/88.

Roughness must be according to roughness scale, segment 3-4 of the type G comparator as per DIN EN
ISO 8503-1 (peak-to-valley height Ry5: 40 - 85 μm).
With sheet thicknesses < 5 mm, be careful not to cause damage through sand-blasting. Be sure to use the
correct jet pressure and abrasive.
Coating Signs / labels Anti-slip surface

Use a primer coat only for light colours
on a dark substrate Amerlock 450E 40 μm
RAL 9010 pure white
Amercoat 450E 40 μm Feycomastic PU μm

Non-slip
Top coat
Light yellow / light grey / RAL 7047* RAL 7016

RAL 9003
* Special colours: Ask manufacturer for specification
375 LHM 550_001

Maintenance
Area Mechanical, hydraulic and elec Slewing bearings Fuel tank / hydraulic tank intern
trical parts and components ally coated
Remove any areas of corrosion with sandpaper (60 ć 80 grit) or a wheel sander, St 2 according to DIN EN
ISO 8501 - 1 to 4.
With sheet thicknesses < 5 mm, be careful not to cause damage through mechanical removal of corrosion.
Caution: Do not polish
Amerlock 400AL 80 μm Delta Tone 9000 30 μm Interline 850 100 μm

Primer coat, all machine types
Aluminium Silver Beige
Amerlock 400C 80 μm
Top coat inside, intermediate coat, out
side only for marine corrosion protec Colour: Colour: Colour:
tion
RAL 9002
Amercoat 450E 80 μm Alkydspray 30 μm Interline 850 100 μm

Top coat outside, all machine types
Aluminium White
Cover with Sikaflex 222 black (wherever necessary, joints, corners, etc.).
LHM 550_001 376

Maintenance
5.24.5 Recommended coating materials

Thinner
Amercoat 65 (8301 731 14)
Amercoat 920 (1022 6622)

Application:
GTA 220 (8301 008 14)
GTA 007 (8301 458 14)
V 3000 (8900 304 14)

Repairs to the corrosion protection can be applied with a brush, roller, airless spraying, etc.
For application with a flow cup spray gun, it is recommended to add thinner according to the manufacturer's instructions.
IMPORTANT!
Observe the manufacturer's instruction leaflets.
Product name: ID no.: Colour: Package:

Amerlock 400AL 8311 730 14 RAL 9002 (grey white) 10 l
Amerlock 400AL is a high build 2-component epoxy resin coating with aluminium pigmentation.
Amerlock 400AL is used mainly as an anti-corrosion primer.
X
Amerlock 400AL must be treated with a protective coating against environmental influences.
Amercoat 71TC 8301 047 14 Iron oxide red 20 l
Amercoat 71TC is a 2-component epoxy resin coating.
Used as an adhesion agent on galvanised metals, non-ferrous metals, etc. To provide a further build-up of coating, the use of an intermediate coat is (Amer
lock 400C) is recommended.
Amerlock 400C 8311 730 14 RAL 9002 (grey white) 10 l
Amerlock 400C is a high-build 2-component epoxy resin coating. Amerlock 400C is used primarily as an intermediate coat. X
Amerlock 400C must be treated with a protective coating against environmental influences. On all internal surfaces of the crane Amerlock 400C is used as
a top coat and does not have to be protected with any other coating.
Amercoat 450E 8900 526 14 See top coat paint plan 20 l
Amercoat 450E is a 2-component polyurethane top coat that is resistant to environmental influences. X
Amercoat 450E can be used for corrosion protection of category C4 M, C5 I L and C5 M L, only in conjunction with 3 coat systems. Always consult the
manufacturer regarding the finish coat used.
Intertherm 50 8301 120 14 Silver 5l
Intertherm 50 is a silicone-resin-based, single-component, high-temperature coating.
X
Intertherm 50 is abrasion and weather-resistant only after heating up to approx. 200°C.
Interline 850 8301 078 14 Beige 20 l
8301 079 14 White X
Interline 850 is an epoxy-phenol-resin-based 2-component high-build tank internal coating.
Feycomastic Antirutsch 8900 217 14 RAL 7016 (anthracite) 20 l
Feycomastic PU Rutschfest is a 2-component coating with plastic pellets. X
For use on all walkable surfaces. Use only with a flow cup spray gun (spray pressure approx. 1.5 bar). Bare metal surfaces must be pretreated with corro
sion protection (in accordance with the repair instructions above). Roughen hardened top coatings with emery cloth.
Delta Tone 9000 - Silver 1l
Delta Tone is a zinc aluminium gill coating.
Used only for anti-corrosion coating on slewing bearings.
Delta Tone may only be overpainted with nitro-combination paint in order to achieve abrasion and weather resistance.
Aluminium Spray 8900 541 14 RAL 9006 (white aluminium) 400 ml
Aluminium spray is an alkyl-resin-based single-component paint spray.
As protection for Delta Tone,
Repair of standard fastenings (screws, nuts, washers, cotter pins, etc.)
Sikaflex 222 100 996 56 Black 310 ml
1K PUR sealing and adhesive compound with good UV and weather resistance.
Solvent-free.
377 LHM 550_001

Tabela Técnica LHM550 141044 - BAL - 001 - EN 550

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tabela Técnica LHM550 141044 - BAL - 001 - EN 550

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating manual EN

ORIGINAL 001 - .0.2011 / lwnscr2

RAIO CURVA DE CARGA PESADA 75% GRAB MOTORIZADO

ITEM CODE: 10563184

MINIMO RADIO MAXIMO RADIO

MINIMO RADIO MAXIMO RADIO

TABLA DE CARGA PARA TRANSLÃÇAO DO EQUIPAMENTO COM SPREADER, GRAB

ITEM CODE: 10563184

Work with or on the machine includes:

Compliance with the operation manual by maintenance personnel:

Latest version of the documentation

To ensure the documentation is always complete and up to date:

The operation manual contains:

The technical information contains:

The documentation accompanying the product contains documentation re­

The spare parts catalogue provides information about:

The CD-ROM contains all the machine documentation in digital form.

System requirements for use of the CD

This documentation is protected by copyright. The information and images in

Liebherr-Werk Nenzing Gmbh

Telephone: +43 50809 41-0

1.4 Appropriate use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

1.5 Inappropriate use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

1.6 Technical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

1.7 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

1.8 Safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

2.2 Requirements to personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

2.3 Personal protective equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

2.4 Work area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

2.5 Danger zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

2.6 Safety signs on the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

2.7 Safety signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

2.9 Danger from electrical energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

2.10 How to respond in the event of a current transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

2.11 How to respond in the event of a fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

2.12 Hand signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

3. Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

3.2 Control station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

3.3 Left master switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

3.4 Right master switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

3.5 Control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

3.6 Litronic screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

4.2 Commissioning the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

4.3 Safety lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

4.4 Travelling mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

4.5 Supporting the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

4.7 Fuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

4.8 Air cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

4.9 Auxiliary supply* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

4.10 Correcting rope twist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

4.11 Four-rope grab* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

4.12 Motor grab* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

4.13 Rotator* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

4.14 Spreader* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

4.15 Laying down the boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

4.16 Video monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

4.17 Litronic testing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

4.19 Windscreen wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

4.20 Telephone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

4.21 PA amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

4.22 Undercarriage bell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

4.23 Emergency exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

4.24 Decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

ORIGINAL 001 - .0.2011 / lwnscr2

The documentation accompanying the product contains documentation re